DataMuseum.dk

Presents historical artifacts from the history of:

Rational R1000/400 Tapes

This is an automatic "excavation" of a thematic subset of
artifacts from Datamuseum.dk's BitArchive.

See our Wiki for more about Rational R1000/400 Tapes

Excavated with: AutoArchaeologist - Free & Open Source Software.


top - download
Index: ┃ H T

⟦571f7bf8b⟧ TextFile

    Length: 427379 (0x68573)
    Types: TextFile
    Names: »Help_Data«

Derivation

└─⟦6ac9a67ca⟧ Bits:30000548 8mm tape, Rational 1000, access 1_0_1
    └─ ⟦78f173837⟧ »DATA« 
        └─⟦687a7d38f⟧ 
└─⟦d10a02448⟧ Bits:30000409 8mm tape, Rational 1000, ENVIRONMENT, D_12_7_3
    └─ ⟦fc9b38f02⟧ »DATA« 
        └─⟦687a7d38f⟧ 
            └─⟦76eb391d8⟧ 
                └─⟦56d8da70c⟧ 
                    └─ ⟦this⟧ »Rational_Access/Help_Data« 

TextFile

#Help Data Version
Release 1_0_0 
November 16, 1992 at 5:12:53 PM by JAF 


#File Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]). 
      
  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>New...
------
  Provides commands for creating various objects.
  

>>Browse...
---------
  Allows you to visit any object.
  

>>Open
----
  Opens an object for editing. If the object is not
  editable (for example, a library), a dialog box
  appears, depending on the kind of object.
  

>>Close
-----
  Abandons editing of the current image. If the image
  has unsaved changes, a confirmation dialog appears,
  giving you the option to save the changes. The
  image does not remain listed in the Image Palette
  after it is closed.
  

>>Save
----
  Makes permanent any changes made to the image in
  the current window. The image remains open for
  further editing.
  

>>Revert
------
  Restores the image in the current window to the
  current committed (permanent) value of the version
  and discards any changes that may have been made to
  the image.
  

>>Print...
--------
  Prints any image or object to a selected printer.
  

>>Properties...
-------------
  Provides editable information about the current
  object.
  

>>Copy File...
------------
  Copies the contents of one or more existing source
  objects to or into the specified destination
  object(s).


>>Move File...
------------
  Copies the contents of one or more source objects
  to or into the specified destination object(s) and
  then deletes the source object(s). 
  

>>Delete File...
--------------
  Destroys all versions of the specified object. If
  the specified object has children, such as a
  library, Delete File also destroys those child
  objects. See the Rational Access User's Guide for
  more information.


>>Insert File...
--------------
  Inserts the named text file into the current Ada
  image at the current cursor position.


>>Run...
------
  Executes the specified command or Ada program. You
  can run the executable under the debugger, if so
  desired.


>>Exit...
-------
  Logs you out of the Environment and the current
  session. If you have unsaved changes, a dialog box
  appears giving you the option to save the changes
  and commit the open images. 
  
#File New Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).`
      
  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Text File...
------------
  Creates a new empty text file. A window is created
  containing the image of the text file, and the
  image is open for editing.
           

>>Ada
---
  Creates an insertion point in a library where an
  Ada compilation unit can be inserted.
  

>>World...
-------
  Creates a world with the specified name on the
  specified volume. 
  

>>Directory...
------------
  Creates a directory with the specified name.

  The new directory is built on the same volume as
  the nearest enclosing world. Furthermore, the new
  directory gets its library switch-file association
  from its parent library.
  

>>Subsystem...
------------
  Subsystems partition a project or application into
  high-level components by grouping Ada units or
  other objects.

  The new subsystem contains an empty working view
  that has the specified imports.
  

>>Working View...
---------------
  Creates a copy of the specified views, starting a
  new development path or subpath.

  A path is a logically connected series of views
  within a subsystem or a system. For each view
  specified, the File:New:Working View command
  creates a new working view that serves as the start
  of such a series of views.

  A subsystem or a system can contain multiple paths.
  For example, if an application has multiple
  targets, a path can be made for each target.
  Similarly, if a new major release of an application
  must be developed while the existing release is
  maintained, a separate path can be made for the new
  major release.
  

>>Spec View...
------------
  Creates one or more new spec views by copying the
  specified view or views. A spec view defines the
  set of implemented units that are potentially
  available, or visible, to units in views of other
  subsystems. Spec views thus define a subsystem's
  exports; as such, spec views can be imported by
  client views in other subsystems. In a sense, a
  spec view is analogous to an Ada package
  specification, which defines the resources that are
  available to client units.
  

>>Release View...
---------------
  Creates a release view or a configuration release. 
  
  A release view is a complete frozen copy of a
  working view. As such, a release view contains
  program source code, and, if the release view has
  been compiled, the units in the release view can be
  executed. You should make a release view from a
  compiled working view whenever you want to both
  preserve a configuration in a working view and be
  able to execute its units. (Note that the original
  working view itself is not frozen, so it is always
  available for further development.)

  A configuration release preserves the state of a
  working view, without creating a release view. As
  such, a configuration release is a summary of
  configuration information from which a release view
  subsequently can be constructed, if desired. You
  should make a configuration release when you want
  to keep a record of a particular configuration, but
  you do not need to execute the units immediately.
  Making a configuration release is faster and uses
  less storage than making a release view.
  

>>Code View...
------------
  Creates a code view. Code views are copies of views
  that contain only the executable code from the
  view. Code views are especially useful when
  security requirements restrict visibility to
  portions of source code.
  

>>Switch File...
--------------
  Creates a library or session switch file of the
  specified name and type. If the specified switch
  file already exists, a new version, containing the
  system-defined default values, is created. This new
  version overwrites the existing version.
  

>>Activity...
-----------
  Creates a new activity, which is an execution table
  that must be set up to specify which of the
  alternative load views is to be used from each
  subsystem. The activity contains one entry for each
  subsystem that is required for execution.
  

>>Mailbox...
----------
  Creates a mailbox with a specified name for the
  specified user.

  The mailbox is created in the specified user's home
  library in a directory called Mailbox. If the
  directory does not exist, it is created.
  

>>Venture...
----------
  Creates a new venture. A venture is a management
  tool that contains information about groups of work
  order lists and controls their use. Each work order
  must have a venture that is its "parent."  
  

>>Work Order
----------
  Creates a work order on the specified venture and
  adds it to a work-order list. Work orders are
  designed to communicate details about specific
  tasks to be accomplished.
  

>>Work Order List...
------------------
  Creates a new work-order list on the specified
  venture. A work-order list contains groups of
  related work orders.
  

>>System...
---------
  Creates a new system. A system pulls an
  application's components together by logically
  grouping particular releases from the component
  subsystems. Operations for systems are in package
  Cmvc_Hierarchy.
   
  The new subsystem or system contains an empty
  working view that has the specified imports. This
  command also can be used to create an empty view in
  an existing subsystem or system.
  
  By default, the model for the system is !Model.R1000. 
  

#New Text File 
  File:New:Text File creates a new empty text file. A
  window is created containing the image of the text
  file, and the image is open for editing.
   

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the file to be created. The name
  must be a legal filename. The default is
  Current_Library.New_File, where Current_Library is
  the library from which you executed the command.
  Typing directly on the New_File prompt replaces
  that prompt.
 
  If you specify a single name component, the new
  world is created under that name in the current
  library. Alternatively, you can specify a qualified
  name to create the world in a location other than
  the current library (however, the specified
  location must exist). Wildcards, context prefixes,
  and attributes can be used except in the rightmost
  component of the name (the object's simple name).
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Text.Create


#New World
  File:New:World creates a world with the specified
  name. The file is created on the volume with the
  most available disk space.


>>OPTIONS
------
    
>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the world to be created. You must
  specify a single object that does not already
  exist. The default is Current_Library.New_World,
  where Current_Library is the library from which you
  executed the command. Typing directly on the
  New_World prompt replaces that prompt.
 
  If you specify a single name component, the new
  world is created under that name in the current
  library. Alternatively, you can specify a qualified
  name to create the world in a location other than
  the current library (however, the specified
  location must exist). Wildcards, context prefixes,
  and attributes can be used except in the rightmost
  component of the name (the object's simple name).


>>Model
-----
  Enter the model to be used in creating the new
  world. The new world gets its links, its target
  key, and its library switches from the model. By
  default, !Model.R1000 is used, which has links to
  most Environment resources. Specifying the null
  string ("") creates a world with no links and with
  a target key for R1000 compilation. When the null
  string is specified, the new world inherits its
  library switch-file association from its parent
  library.
  

>>RESTRICTIONS
------------

  Worlds can be created only in other worlds and in
  directories that are nested in other worlds. Worlds
  cannot be created in subsystems or views.
          

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Create_World
  procedure Library.Nil

#New Directory
  File:New:Directory creates a directory with the
  specified name.

  The new directory is built on the same volume as
  the nearest enclosing world. Furthermore, the new
  directory gets its library switch-file association
  from its parent library.

  
>>OPTIONS 
-------

>>Directory Name 
--------------
  Enter the name of the new directory at the prompt.
  This entry box must specify a single object that
  does not already exist. The default is
  Current_Library.New_Directory, where
  Current_Library is the library from which you
  executed the command. Typing directly on the
  New_Directory prompt replaces that prompt.
  
  If a single name component is specified, the new
  directory is created under that name in the current
  library. Alternatively, a qualified name can be
  specified to create the directory in a location
  other than the current library (however, the
  specified location must exist). Wildcards, context
  prefixes, and attributes can be used, except in the
  New_Directory prompt itself.
      

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Create_Directory  
  
#New Subsystem
  File:New:Subsystem creates a new subsystem.
  Subsystems partition a project or application into
  high-level components by grouping Ada units or
  other objects.

  The new subsystem contains an empty working view
  that has the specified imports. 
   

>>OPTIONS
-------

>> Name
----
  Enter the name of the new subsystem at the
  New_Subsystem prompt. This entry box must specify a
  single object that does not already exist. The
  default is Current_Library.New_Subsystem, where
  Current_Library is the library from which you
  executed the command. Typing directly on the
  New_Subsystem prompt replaces that prompt.
  
  If you specify a single name component, the new
  world is created under that name in the current
  library. Alternatively, you can specify a qualified
  name to create the world in a location other than
  the current library (however, the specified
  location must exist). Wildcards, context prefixes,
  and attributes can be used except in the rightmost
  component of the name (the object's simple name).


>>Initial View Name
------------------
  Enter the full name of the initial working view to
  be created as part of the subsystem. The default
  name of the initial view of the subsystem or system
  is: System_Object.Working_View_Base_Name_Working.


>>Kind
----
  From the Kind option menu, choose the kind of view
  to create. Spec_Load creates a load view. A load
  view contains the implementation of a subsystem.
  Using spec and load views minimizes the
  recompilation required after changes are made and
  eliminates the need for recompilation during
  recombinant testing. 
  
  Combined creates a combined view. A combined view
  both contains the subsystem implementation and
  expresses the exports from that implementation.
  Using combined views does not reduce the
  recompilation requirements; however, you must use
  combined view when generics or inlined subprograms
  are exported from implementations for non-R1000
  targets.


>>Model
-----
  Enter the model to be used in creating the new
  world. The new world gets its links, its target
  key, and its library switches from the model. By
  default, !Model.R1000 is used, which has links to
  most Environment resources. Specifying the null
  string ("") creates a world with no links and with
  a target key for R1000 compilation. When the null
  string is specified, the new world inherits its
  library switch-file association from its parent
  library. 
        

>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments.

 
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Initial


#New Working View
  File:New:Working View creates a copy of the
  specified view, starting a new development path or
  subpath.

  A path is a logically connected series of views
  within a subsystem or a system. The
  File:New:Working View command creates a new working
  view that serves as the start of such a series of
  views.

  A subsystem or a system can contain multiple paths.
  For example, if an application has multiple
  targets, a path can be made for each target.
  Similarly, if a new major release of an application
  must be developed while the existing release is
  maintained, a separate path can be made for the new
  major release.

  
>>OPTIONS
------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new working view. The Name
  entry box can contain any string that constitutes a
  legal Ada identifier and therefore can contain one
  or more underscore characters. Note that other CMVC
  operations (such as generating reservation tokens
  or creating subpaths) conventionally consider a
  view's pathname prefix to be the portion of a view
  name up to (but not including) the first underscore
  in the name.
                                              

>>Kind
----
  Choose the kind of view to create. Load creates a
  load view. A load view contains the implementation
  of a subsystem. Using spec and load views minimizes
  the recompilation required after changes are made
  and eliminates the need for recompilation during
  recombinant testing.
 
  Combined creates a combined view. A combined view
  both contains the subsystem implementation and
  expresses the exports from that implementation.
  Using combined views does not reduce the
  recompilation requirements; however, you must use
  combined view when generics or inlined subprograms
  are exported from implementations for non-R1000
  targets.


>>Join
----
  A new view can, but need not, be joined to the
  source view (and hence to the path) from which it
  is created. Two paths should be joined (by checking
  this box) if the majority of the controlled objects
  in them are to be joined. (Joined objects cannot be
  checked out and modified independently.) The
  controlled objects that need to be modified
  independently can be severed subsequently with the
  CMVC:Sever command. For example, if an application
  has two targets, the target-independent code is
  shared and the target-dependent code is not.
  Assuming that a path already exists for one of the
  targets, a joined path can be created for the
  second target and then the target-dependent units
  can be severed.
                                           
  A new view should not be joined to the view from
  which it is created if most of the controlled
  objects in these two paths are to be modified
  independently. For example, if a new major release
  of an application is developed while the previous
  major release is maintained, the objects in the two
  paths typically need to be modified independently,
  so the paths are not joined. (Note that changes can
  be propagated across unjoined objects with the
  Cmvc.Merge_Changes Environment command.) Although
  the new path is not joined when created, individual
  objects in it subsequently can be joined to the
  corresponding objects in other views (see the
  CMVC:Join command).
  

>>Copy Of
-------
  Enter the view that is to be copied as the
  beginning of new path or subpath. The default is
  the view on which the cursor is located. In this
  entry box, you can name:

  * Combined, load, or spec views
  * Either working or released views
      
  All controlled objects in a view named in the Copy
  Of entry box must be checked in.
    

>>Same Imports
------------
  Checking this box causes the new working view to
  use the same imports as the view from which it was
  copied.
       

>>New Imports
-----------
  Checking this box causes the new working view to
  use only the imports you enter in the associated
  entry box.
    
  Multiple views can be specified by using wildcards,
  context characters, special names, set notation, or
  an indirect file. Furthermore, this field can name
  an activity as an indirect file, which is
  equivalent to naming the spec view associated with
  each subsystem listed in the activity.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments.
      

>>Model
-----
  Enter the model world or view from which to create
  the new world view. If the specified name cannot be
  resolved in the context !Model, the name is
  resolved relative to the current context. By
  default, the new working view uses the same model
  as the view from which it was copied.
   

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Make_Path
  procedure Cmvc.Sever
  procedure Cmvc.Merge_Changes

Rational Access Help
  CMVC:Join
  
  
#New Spec View
  File:New:Spec View creates one or more new spec
  views by copying the specified view or views. A
  spec view defines the set of implemented units that
  are potentially available, or visible, to units in
  views of other subsystems. Spec views thus define a
  subsystem's exports; as such, spec views can be
  imported by client views in other subsystems. In a
  sense, a spec view is analogous to an Ada package
  specification, which defines the resources that are
  available to client units.

  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new spec view.
    
  
>>Copy Of
-------
  Enter the view that is to be copied as the source
  of the new spec view. The default is the view on
  which the cursor is located. In this entry box, you
  can name:

  * Combined, load, or spec views
  * Either working or released views
      
  All controlled objects in a view named in the Copy
  Of entry box must be checked in.
  

>>Join
----
  A new spec view can, but need not, be joined to the
  source view (and hence to the path) from which it
  is created. Two paths should be joined (by checking
  this box) if the majority of the controlled objects
  in them are to be joined. (Joined objects cannot be
  checked out and modified independently.) The
  controlled objects that need to be modified
  independently can be severed subsequently with the
  CMVC:Sever command. For example, if an application
  has two targets, the target-independent code is
  shared and the target-dependent code is not.
  Assuming that a path already exists for one of the
  targets, a joined path can be created for the
  second target and then the target-dependent units
  can be severed.
                                           
  A new spec view should not be joined to the view
  from which it is created if most of the controlled
  objects in these two paths are to be modified
  independently. For example, if a new major release
  of an application is developed while the previous
  major release is maintained, the objects in the two
  paths typically need to be modified independently,
  so the paths are not joined. (Note that changes can
  be propagated across unjoined objects with the
  Cmvc.Merge_Changes Environment command.) Although
  the new path is not joined when created, individual
  objects in it subsequently can be joined to the
  corresponding objects in other views (see the
  CMVC:Join command).
  

>>Same Imports
------------
  Checking this box causes the new spec view to use
  the same imports as the view from which it was
  copied.
  

>>New Imports
-----------
  Checking this box causes the new spec view to use
  only the imports you enter in the associated entry
  box.
    
  Multiple views can be specified by using wildcards,
  context characters, special names, set notation, or
  an indirect file. Furthermore, this field can name
  an activity as an indirect file, which is
  equivalent to naming the spec view associated with
  each subsystem listed in the activity.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments.
  

>>Model
-----
  Enter the model world for the new spec view. If the
  specified name cannot be resolved in the context
  !Model, the name is resolved relative to the
  current context. By default, the new spec view uses
  the same model as the view from which it was
  copied.
     

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Copy
  
  
#New Release View
  File:New:Release View creates a release view or a
  configuration release, depending on if you check
  the Build Full View Copy box (release view) or the
  Save Release Generation Information Only box
  (configuration release).
  
  A release view is a complete frozen copy of a
  working view. As such, a release view contains
  program source code, and, if the release view has
  been compiled, the units in the release view can be
  executed. You should make a release view from a
  compiled working view whenever you want to both
  preserve a configuration in a working view and be
  able to execute its units. (Note that the original
  working view itself is not frozen, so it is always
  available for further development.)

  A configuration release preserves the state of a
  working view, without creating a release view. As
  such, a configuration release is a summary of
  configuration information from which a release view
  subsequently can be constructed, if desired. You
  should make a configuration release when you want
  to keep a record of a particular configuration, but
  you do not need to execute the units immediately.
  Making a configuration release is faster and uses
  less storage than making a release view.
  
  Note that if you are making a configuration
  release, the Kind, Join, Imports, and Model fields
  will be ignored.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new release view. If the
  source view is Rev1_Working, the default name is
  usually of the form Rev1_1. 
        
  
>>Kind
----
  Choose the kind of view to create. Spec_Load
  creates a load view. A load view contains the
  implementation of a subsystem. Using spec and load
  views minimizes the recompilation required after
  changes are made and eliminates the need for
  recompilation during recombinant testing.
 
  Combined creates a combined view. A combined view
  both contains the subsystem implementation and
  expresses the exports from that implementation.
  Using combined views does not reduce the
  recompilation requirements; however, you must use
  combined view when generics or inlined subprograms
  are exported from implementations for non-R1000
  targets.
         

>>Join
----
  A new release view can, but need not, be joined to
  the source view (and hence to the path) from which
  it is created. Joined objects are represented in a
  single series of generations stored in the CMVC
  database. In general, you should join the release
  view to its source view.
  
 
>>Copy Of
------
  Enter the view from which to create the release
  view. The default is the view on which the cursor
  is located. In this entry box, you can name:

  * Combined, load, or spec views
  * Either working or released views
      
  All controlled objects in a view named in the Copy
  Of entry box must be checked in.
  

>>Same Imports
-----------
  Checking this box causes the new release view to
  use the same imports as the view from which it was
  copied.
  
  
>>New Imports
-----------
  Checking this box causes the new release view to
  use only the imports you enter in the associated
  entry box.
    
  Multiple views can be specified by using wildcards,
  context characters, special names, set notation, or
  an indirect file. Furthermore, this entry box can
  name an activity as an indirect file, which is
  equivalent to naming the spec view associated with
  each subsystem listed in the activity.
  
  
>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments.
  
  
>>Model
-----
  Enter the model to be used in creating the new
  release view. The new view gets its target key and
  its library switches from the model. By default,
  !Model.R1000 is used. Specifying the null string
  ("") creates a view with a target key for R1000
  compilation. When the null string is specified, the
  new view inherits its library switch-file
  association from the parent subsystem.
  
  
>>Build Full View Copy
--------------------
  Check this box to make a release view.
  
  
>>Save Release Generation Information Only
----------------------------------------
  Check this box to make a configuration release. If
  this box if checked, the Kind, Join, Imports, and
  Model fields are ignored.


>>SEE ALSO
--------
 
Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Copy
  procedure Cmvc.Release
  

#New Code View
  File:New:Code View creates a code view. Code views
  are copies of views that contain only the
  executable code from the view. Code views are
  especially useful when security requirements
  restrict visibility to portions of source code.
  

>>OPTIONS
------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new code view.
  

>>Copy Of
-------
  Enter the name of the view from which the code view
  is to be made. The named view must be a load view.
  The default is the view on which the cursor is
  located. All units in the named view must be coded
  and must contain bodies for all specifications that
  require them. All controlled units in the named
  views must be checked in.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Make_Code_View
  

#New Switch File
  File:New:Switch File creates a library switch file
  of the specified name. If the specified switch file
  already exists, a new version, containing the
  system-defined default values, is created.
  
  WARNING: This new version overwrites the existing
  version.
    
  When switch files are first created, they are
  empty. An empty switch file is one in which all of
  the switch values are the system-defined default
  values. These values are "hard-wired" and are not
  read from any other switch file. These
  system-defined values are also used if no switch
  file exists. Thus, you need to create a switch file
  only if you want to edit a switch so that it uses a
  nondefault value.
  
  Library switch files must be associated explicitly
  with a directory or world to affect operations or
  units in that directory or world. To associate a
  library switch file, use the Switches.Associate
  Environment command.
  
  Switch files can also be created using the
  Switches.Create Environment command.
  
  To create a session switch file for the current
  session, execute the Session:Session Switches menu
  command.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the switch file to be created. 
  
  Note that the name of a session switch file must
  follow the naming convention Session_Name_Switches
  for it to affect that session. For example, the
  session switch file S_1_Switches affects the way
  the system behaves in session S_1.

  Note that session switch files must located in your
  home library.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Switches.Associate
  procedure Switches.Define
  procedure Switches.Create
    

#New Activity
   File:New:Activity creates a new activity file,
   which is an execution table that must be set up to
   specify which of the alternative load views is to
   be used from each subsystem. The activity contains
   one entry for each subsystem that is required for
   execution.


>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new activity.
  

>>Copy Of
-------
  Enter the name of the activity from which the new
  activity is to be created. Entering the null string
  ("") causes an empty activity to be created. The
  default is the default activity for the current
  session.
  

>>Exact Copy Preserving References
--------------------------------
  Check this box to indicate that the new activity
  should be formed as an exact copy of the source
  activity. Thus, if the source entry contains the
  name of an actual view, the new entry also will
  contain an identical indirect reference.
  

>>Exact Copy Replacing References with Values
-------------------------------------------
  Check this box to indicate that the new activity
  should be formed as the dereferenced value of the
  corresponding source activity. Indirect
  (differential) references will be resolved until an
  actual view is found.
  

>>Differential
------------
  Check this box to indicate that the new activity
  should be formed as an indirect reference to the
  source activity. The created activity will not
  contain the name of a view but the name of another
  activity that specifies an actual view or another
  activity from which to derive the view. With this
  mode, changes made to the source activity will be
  reflected in the target activity.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
---------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Activity.Create
  

#New Mailbox
  File:New:Mailbox creates a mailbox with a specified
  name for the specified user.

  The mailbox is created in the specified user's home
  library in a directory called Mailbox. If the
  directory does not exist, it is created. 


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Mailbox Simple Name
-------------------
  Enter the name for the mailbox. The mailbox named
  Main is the mailbox into which mail is received. 


>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Mail User's Manual
  procedure Mail.Create
    

#New Venture
  File:New:Venture creates a new venture. A venture
  is a management tool that contains information
  about groups of work-order lists and controls their
  use. Each work order must have a venture that is
  its "parent."
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the venture. 
  

>>Notes
-----
  Enter a string to be saved in the notes field of
  the venture. Notes typically are used to provide a
  brief description of the venture.
  
  
>>Make Default
------------
  Check this box to make the new venture become the
  default venture for the current session.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Work_Order.Create_Venture
  

#New Work Order 
  File:New:Work Order creates a work order on the
  specified venture and adds it to a work-order list.
  Work orders are designed to communicate details
  about specific tasks to be accomplished.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new work-order. 
  

>>Notes
-----
  Enter a string to be saved in the notes field of
  the work order. Notes typically are used to provide
  a brief description of the work order.
  

>>Venture
-------
  Enter the name of the venture for which the work
  order is created. The default is the venture for
  the current session.
  

>>Work Order List
---------------
  Enter the name of the work order list to which the
  new work order is to be added.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Work_Order.Create
    
    
#New Work Order List
  File:New:Work Order List creates a new work-order
  list on the specified venture. A work-order list
  contains groups of related work orders.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the new work-order list. 
 

>>Ventures
--------
  Enter the name of the venture to which the new
  work-order list is added. The default is the
  venture for the current session.


>>Make Default
------------
  Check this box to set the new work-order list as
  the default for the current session.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Work_Order.Create_List
    
    
#New System
  File:New:Subsystem creates a new system. A system
  pulls an application's components together by
  logically grouping particular releases from the
  component subsystems. Operations for systems are in
  package Cmvc_Hierarchy.
   
  The new system contains an empty working view that
  has the specified imports.
  
  The model for the system is !Model.R1000.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the system. 

>>Initial View Name
-----------------
  Enter the name of the initial system view. By
  default, the name of the initial view of the system
  is: System_Object.Working_View_Base_Name_Working
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Initial
  procedure Cmvc.System
                       
  

#Browse
  File:Browse allows you to visit any object.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the object to visit. The object
  can be a library, file, Ada unit, etc. You may
  enter a full pathname or a pathname relative to
  your current library. By default, the object name
  that appears in the Name entry box is the last
  object you have visited using the File:Browse
  command.
    
    
>>SEE ALSO
--------  
  
Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Common.Definition
  
  
#Open
  File:Open opens an object for editing. If the
  object is not editable (for example, a library), a
  dialog box appears, depending on the kind of
  object.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access Help
  File Open Check Out 
  File Open Demote
  
#Open Check Out
  The File:Open Check Out box reserves the right to
  modify the specified controlled object or objects
  by acquiring the objects' reservation tokens.

  Controlled objects can be modified only while they
  are checked out. When objects are joined across
  multiple views, they share the same reservation
  token, so that only one of the joined objects can
  be checked out at a time. Checking out a joined
  object in one view renders the corresponding
  objects in the other views unavailable for update.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the object to be checked out.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter any comments in this box. All characters,
  including the [Tab] key, are interpreted as literal
  characters.
  

>>Automatic Demotion if Needed
----------------------------
  If the specified object was last checked out in
  another view, it must be updated to the latest
  generation before it can be checked out. Updating
  the object may call for demoting specified or
  dependent Ada units.

  Choose this box to allow the command to demote Ada
  units in order to update the specified objects to
  the latest generation. If this box is checked, the
  command is permitted to demote Ada units if
  necessary. The command does not recompile any units
  that were demoted. If this box is not checked, the
  command proceeds only if no demotion is required;
  otherwise, an error is reported and the command
  quits.
  
  Choosing this box has no effect if Automatic Accept
  Latest Generation is not chosen. 


>>Automatic Accept Latest Generation
----------------------------------
  If the specified object was last checked out in
  another view, it must be updated to the latest
  generation before it can be checked out.

  Choose this box to allow the command to update the
  specified objects to the latest generation. If this
  box is checked, the command is permitted to update
  the objects. If it is not checked, the command
  proceeds only if the specified objects are already
  the latest generation; otherwise, an error is
  reported and the command quits.


>>SEE ALSO
---------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Check_Out
  

#Open Demote
  The File:Open Demote box demotes a coded or
  installed Ada unit to source and opens it for
  editing. This dialog box lists how many units and
  how many lines of code will be demoted.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual  
  procedure Common.Definition 
  procedure Common.Edit

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual  
  procedure Cmvc.Check_Out
  
#Print
  File:Print prints any image or object to a selected
  printer.

  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the object or image to be
  printed. The default is the contents of the current
  window. To print multiple objects or images, enter
  the names of the objects using an appropriate
  naming expression:
  
  #      Matches a single character other than a period

  @      Matches zero or more characters not containing 
         a period. 
         
  ?      Matches zero or more nonworld name components.

  ??     Matches zero or more name components and all
         their contents.

  [...]  Encloses a set of names.

  ~name  Excludes a name from a set. 
    

>>Selected Printer
----------------
  Enter the name of the printer you want the object
  or image printed on. You can also click the name of
  the printer in the associated list box to make it
  appear in the Selected Printer entry box.
  
  This list of your available printer configurations
  is set in !Machine.Initialization by your system
  manager. The list is empty if your printers are
  configured in another way.
 
  
>>Print Options
-------------
  * Border: Prints a border around the page. If the
    Twoup option (see below) is also selected, a
    border is printed around both text areas on the
    page.

  * Date: Prints the date and time of the printout at
    the bottom of each page in verbose format, such
    as October 23, 1992 at 2:46:14 PM.

  * Filename: Prints the full pathname of the file at
    the top of each page. If the printout is a mail
    message or I/O window, the image does not have an
    associated object with a pathname. In this case,
    the image is written to a temporary file, whose
    name is displayed if you check this box.
  
  * Ada Format: Prints Ada reserved words in bold
    when printing source code.


>>Page Layout
-----------
  * Twoup: Prints two text areas (in book form)
    across the length of a single page. If you are
    printing a PostScript file that specifies
    orientation, this option will be overridden.

  * Portrait: Prints the page vertically. If you are
    printing a PostScript file that specifies
    orientation, this option will be overridden.
  
  * Landscape: Prints the page horizontally. If you
    are printing a PostScript file that specifies
    orientation, this option will be overridden.
  
  
>>All Pages
---------
  Check this box to print all pages in the file.
  
  
>>First Page/Last Page
--------------------
  Check this box to print a selected range of pages.
  If you select this option, enter the desired page
  numbers in the associated entry boxes. To print
  only one page, enter that page number in both the
  First Page and Last Page entry boxes.
  
  
>>Other Options
------------
  This entry box will take all of the print options
  as described in procedure Queue.Print. For more
  information, see the System Management Utilities
  (SMU) book of the Environment Reference Manual.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
System Management Utilities (SMU) book of the Environ-
ment Reference Manual 
  package Queue
  

#File Properties 
  File:Properties provides editable information about
  the current file, Ada unit, or mailbox.
  
  This command displays the requested information in
  a dialog box. This information can be modified in
  the dialog box and then changed for the object that
  is selected. The collection of information
  displayed is dependent on the object that is
  selected.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

  When the selected object is a file, an Ada unit or
  a mailbox, the resulting dialog box contains the
  following fields:
 

>>Name
----
  Displays the name of the file, Ada unit, or mailbox
  whose properties are displayed in the dialog box.
  This should not be modified.
  
  
>>Frozen
---------------
  Displays the current state of the object. If this
  box is checked, the object is currently frozen.
  When objects are frozen, no changes can be made to
  them, including changing Ada-unit state. (However,
  frozen units can be executed.) Freezing objects can
  be used as part of releasing software.
  
  If this check box is unchecked when it was
  previously checked, then the Environment unfreezes
  the object. By default, this will also unfreeze
  subobjects.
  
  If the box is unchecked, the object is NOT frozen.
  Objects that are not frozen can be changed. If an
  object is frozen, its children are also frozen.
  
  To change whether the specified objects are frozen,
  change the value of this box and click OK.
    
  Unfreezing an object permits changes to be made to
  it. The command can unfreeze a single object or an
  entire library structure of objects.
                           

>>Under CMVC Control       
------------------
  Displays whether or not the object is under CMVC
  control. If this box is checked, the object is
  currently controlled.
  
  * If you uncheck this box, the object becomes
    uncontrolled, so that change information about it
    is no longer collected in the CMVC database.
    
    Existing history for the object remains in the
    CMVC database until the database is expunged
    using the Cmvc_Maintenance.Expunge_Database
    Environment command.

  * If you check this box, the object becomes
    controlled, and therefore subject to CMVC
    facilities such as reservation tokens and
    history.

    Once controlled, an object must be checked out
    before it can be modified and it must be checked
    in before various commands can access it.
  
  Because controlled objects cannot be deleted or
  withdrawn, making the object uncontrolled prepares
  a controlled object for deletion. Similarly, an Ada
  unit's kind cannot be changed (for example, from
  procedure to function) while the unit is
  controlled. Therefore, the unit must be made
  uncontrolled and then the database must be expunged
  (using Cmvc_Maintenance.Expunge_Database) before
  the unit's kind can be changed. 
  
  Objects can be made controlled again; if the CMVC
  database has not been expunged, the history for the
  recontrolled objects continues where it stopped.
  

>>Checked Out
-----------
  Displays the current state of the object; if the
  box is checked, the object is currently checked
  out.
  
  * If you uncheck this box, the object will be
    checked in.
    
    An object that is checked in cannot be modified
    until it is checked out again. Only controlled
    objects can be checked in or out.
  
  * If you check this box, the object will be checked
    out.
  
  Because checked-in objects cannot be modified in
  any way, it is recommended that all incremental
  additions or changes to Ada units be promoted
  before those units are checked in. Errors will
  result from attempting to compile the checked-in
  units that contain insertion points, because
  promoting insertion points would require the
  modification of checked-in units.

  Note that checking in an object that was made
  controlled without saving source simply releases
  the right to update that object; no text is
  recorded in the CMVC database.
      

>>Access List
-----------
  Displays the username of the creator of the file,
  the read/write access that the creator has, the
  access-control group with access to the file, and
  what the status of that access is.
  
  
>>Read-only Information
---------------------
  Lists the following properties of the selected
  object:

  * Creator
  * Date Created 
  * Object subclass type
  * Total byte size 
  * Updater
  * Update date 


>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual  
  procedure Access_List.Set
  procedure Access_List.Set_Default
  procedure Library.Unfreeze
  procedure Library.Freeze
  
  
#World Properties
  The World Properties dialog box is generated by the
  File:Properties command when the current object is
  a world. This dialog box provides editable
  information about the current world, view, or
  subsystem.

  This command displays the requested information in
  a dialog box. This information can be modified in
  the dialog box and then changed for the object that
  is selected. The collection of information
  displayed is dependent on the object that is
  selected.
  
  Note that when an object of class Session is
  selected, File:Properties does not produce a dialog
  box, but simply opens for editing the session
  switches for the current session. 

  
>>OPTIONS
-------

  When the selected object is a world, view, or
  subsystem, the resulting dialog box contains the
  following fields:
  

>>Name
----
  Displays the name of the selected world, view, or
  subsystem. This should not be modified.
  

>>Frozen
------
  Displays the current state of the object. If this
  box is checked, the object is currently frozen.
  When objects are frozen, no changes can be made to
  them, including changing Ada-unit state. (However,
  frozen units can be executed.) Freezing objects can
  be used as part of releasing software.
  
  If this check box is unchecked when it was
  previously checked, then the Environment unfreezes
  the object. By default, this will also unfreeze
  subobjects.
  
  If the box is unchecked, the object is NOT frozen.
  Objects that are not frozen can be changed. If an
  object is frozen, its children are also frozen.
  
  To change whether the specified objects are frozen,
  change the value of this box and click OK.
    
  Unfreezing an object permits changes to be made to
  it. The command can unfreeze a single object or an
  entire library structure of objects.
  
  
>>Switch File
-----------
  Displays the current switch file associated with
  this object.
  
  If this is modified, an association is built
  between a library switch file and the world
  displayed in the Name entry box. The switches in
  the library switch file are used for all applicable
  operations within that world. The association is by
  reference, which means that changes made to the
  library switch file have an immediate effect on
  subsequent operations or units in the associated
  world.
  
  For more information, see the Switches.Associate
  Environment command in the Library Management (LM)
  book of the Environment Reference Manual.
         

>>Access List
-----------
  Displays the username of the creator of the file,
  the read/write access that the creator has, and the
  access-control group with access to the file, and
  what the status of that access is.
  
  
>>Default ACL
-----------
  Displays the default access control list currently
  set for the object. Modifying this changes the
  default.
  
  Worlds determine the ACLs for new objects created
  within them. In particular, a world's ACL is given
  to any new worlds created within it. Furthermore,
  in addition to its own ACL, every world has a
  default ACL associated with it. The default ACL is
  given to new files and Ada units created within the
  world. In sum:

  * New worlds inherit the ACL of the enclosing world.

  * New files and Ada units inherit the default ACL
    of the enclosing world. (However, a new version
    of a file or Ada unit inherits its ACL from the
    previous version of that object.)

  If you have owner access to the enclosing world,
  you can modify the ACLs that were inherited by the
  new objects, in addition to any other ACLs in the
  world.

  You can use the Set_Default command to specify the
  entire default ACL for a world; the Add_Default
  command is useful for adding one or more entries to
  the default ACL. The Default_Display command
  displays a world's default ACL in an Environment
  output window.
  
  
>>Read-only Information
---------------------
  Displays the following properties of the selected
  object:
  
  * Creator
  * Date created 
  * Object subclass type
  * Total byte size 
  * Updater
  * Update date 
  * Volume
  * Target key information (if available)
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Access_List.Set
  procedure Access_List.Set_Default
  procedure Library.Freeze
  procedure Library.Unfreeze
  procedure Switches.Associate
    

#Directory Properties
  The Directory Properties dialog box is generated by
  the File:Properties command when the current object
  is a directory. This dialog box provides editable
  information about the current directory.

  This command displays the requested information in
  a dialog box. This information can be modified in
  the dialog box and then changed for the object that
  is selected. The collection of information
  displayed is dependent on the object that is
  selected. 
  
  Note that when an object of class Session is
  selected, File:Properties does not produce a dialog
  box, but simply edits the session switches.
   
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

  When the selected object is a directory, the
  resulting dialog box contains the following fields:
                                            
  
>>Name
----
  Displays the name of the selected directory. This
  should not be modified. 
  
  
>>Frozen
------
  If this check box is unchecked when it was
  previously checked, then the Environment unfreezes
  the object. By default, this will also unfreeze
  subobjects.
  
  If the box is unchecked, the object is NOT frozen.
  Objects that are not frozen can be changed. If an
  object is frozen, its children are also frozen.
  
  To change whether the specified objects are frozen,
  change the value of this box and click OK.
    
  Unfreezing an object permits changes to be made to
  it. The command can unfreeze a single object or an
  entire library structure of objects.
  
  
>>Switch File 
----------- 
  Displays the current switch file associated with
  this object.
  
  If this is modified, an association is built
  between a library switch file and the directory
  displayed in the Name entry box. The switches in
  the library switch file are used for all applicable
  operations within that directory. The association
  is by reference, which means that changes made to
  the library switch file have an immediate effect on
  subsequent operations or units in the associated
  directory.
  
  For more information, see the Switches.Associate
  Environment command in the Library Management (LM)
  book of the Environment Reference Manual.
  
  
>>Read-only Information
---------------------
  Displays the following properties of the selected
  object:
  
  * Creator
  * Date created
  * Object subclass type
  * Total byte size
  * Updater
  * Update date
  * Volume
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Freeze
  procedure Library.Unfreeze
  procedure Switches.Associate
    

#Copy File
  File:Copy File copies the contents of one or more
  existing source objects to or into the specified
  destination object(s).
  
  This command can be used to copy objects under a
  different name in the same library. The command
  also can be used to copy objects into a different
  command, under either the same or a different
  simple name. Multiple objects can be copied under
  new names by specifying the Source field with
  wildcards and the Destination field with
  substitution characters.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Source 
------ 
  Enter the name of the object(s) to be copied. The
  default is the current object. Multiple objects can
  be specified using wildcards, context characters,
  set notation, indirect files, and attributes.
  
  The source object(s) must already exist. If a
  source object contains other objects, the contained
  subobjects are copied as well. If more than one
  object is copied, each object is copied
  independently of any other.

  If you are copying a library that is associated
  with a library switch file, then the copy operation
  handles the association as follows:

  * If the library is copied along with its switch
    file, the copy of the library is associated with
    the copy of the switch file. This situation
    frequently arises when you copy a library that
    contains its switch file. Note that when copying
    directories between views in a subsystem, you may
    need to change switch-file associations that
    arise this way.

  * If the library is copied without its switch file,
    the copy is associated with the same switch file
    as the copy's parent library.

  Note that when worlds are copied, its links are
  copied as well. Note also that the semantic
  consistency of copied Ada units is not assured by
  the Copy File command. Semantic references must be
  checked after the object is copied.

  Depending on the types of source and destination
  objects that are specified, the Copy File command
  either copies the source object to the destination
  object (overwriting it or merging their contents)
  or copies the source object into the destination
  object (provided that the destination object can
  contain other objects). For example, copying an
  object from one library to another with the same
  simple name can be accomplished by using the name
  of the destination library as the Destination name.


>>Destination 
----------- 
  Enter the name of the destination library.

  If a relative pathname is specified, it is
  interpreted relative to the current library. The
  default is the current image. Substitution
  characters can be used to create the destination
  name(s) from the source name(s). Each source name
  must map to a unique destination name.

  The destination object may, but need not, already
  exist:

  * If the destination object already exists, it must
    be of the same class as the source object. The
    Copy File command overwrites (and in some cases
    merges) the contents of the destination object
    with the contents of the source object. For Ada
    units and files, a new version of the destination
    object is created, which may force old versions
    of the object to be expunged.

  * If the destination object does not already exist,
    it is created. A newly created destination object
    has the same class as its source object (that is,
    copying a world creates a new world). For all Ada
    units, the destination object is created in the
    source state. 
    
  The table below summarizes the "to" or "into" copy
  operations that result from specifying various
  types of objects as the Destination and Source
  entry boxes. The number in parentheses following
  the results indicates a restriction on the move.
  These restrictions are listed below the table.

 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|Source  |To     |To     |To     |To    |To    |To No | 
|        |Non-Ada|Library|Subunit|World |Direc-|Object| 
|        |Object |Unit   |       |      |tory  |      |
|        |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|Non-Ada |To (1) |Error  |Error  | Into | Into | To   |
|Object  |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|Library |Error  |To     |To     | Into | Into | To   |
|Unit (2)|       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|Subunit |Error  |Into   |To     | Into | Into | To   |
|(2)     |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|World   |Error  |Error  |Error  |To (4)|To (4)| To   |
|(3)     |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 
|Direc-  |Error  |Error  |Error  |To (4)|To (4)| To   |
|tory (3)|       |       |       |      |      |      |
 ----------------------------------------------------- 

   1 The objects must be of the same class.

   2 The subunits of the unit are involved. The
     relative nesting of subunits is preserved.

   3 The subcomponents of the library are involved.
     The relative nesting of subcomponents is
     preserved.

   4 The contents of the Source library are merged
     with the contents of the Destination library.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Copy
  

#Move File
  File:Move File copies the contents of one or more
  source objects to or into the specified destination
  object(s) and then deletes the source object(s).
  
  This command can be used to move an object from one
  library to another, preserving or changing its
  simple name in the new location. This command can
  also be used to give an object a new simple name
  within the same library.
  
  Multiple objects can be moved and given new names
  by specifying the Source name with wildcards and
  the Destination name with substitution characters.
 
    
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Source
------
  Enter the existing object or objects to be moved.
  Multiple objects can be specified using wildcards,
  context characters, set notation, indirect files,
  and attributes. The default is the current
  selection, whether or not the cursor is in the
  selection.
  
  The source object(s) must already exist. If a
  source object contains other objects, the contained
  subobjects are moved as well. If more than one
  object is moved, each object is moved independently
  of any other.

  If deleting a source object would result in
  demotion or obsolescence of any Ada units, that
  source object is copied rather than moved. Objects
  that cannot be copied are not deleted.

  If you are moving a library that is associated with
  a library switch file, then the move operation
  handles the association as follows:

  * If the library is moved along with its switch
    file, the moved library is associated with the
    moved switch file. This situation frequently
    arises when you move a library that contains its
    switch file. Note that when moving directories
    between views in a subsystem, you may need to
    change switch-file associations that arise this
    way.

  * If the library is moved without its switch file,
    the moved library is associated with the same
    switch file as the new parent library.

  Note that when worlds are moved, their links are
  moved as well. Note also that the semantic
  consistency of new Ada units is not assured by this
  command. Semantic references must be checked after
  the object is moved. 


>>Destination
-----------
  Enter the name of the destination object. If a
  relative pathname is specified, it is interpreted
  relative to the current library. The default is the
  current image.

  Substitution characters can be used to create the
  Destination name(s) from the Source name(s);
  however, because the move operation deletes source
  objects, it is recommended that you use the
  Navigate:Resolve Name menu command to test a pair
  of Source and Destination names containing
  wildcards and substitution characters. Each Source
  name must map to a unique Destination name.
  
  If the Destination entry box names an existing
  object, that object is overwritten or objects are
  moved into it, as specified above. If it does not
  name an existing object, the destination object is
  created.

  The destination object may, but need not, already
  exist:

  * If the destination object already exists, it must
    be of the same class as the source object. The
    File:Move command overwrites (and in some cases
    merges) the contents of the destination object
    with the contents of the source object. For Ada
    units and files, a new version of the destination
    object is created, which may force old versions
    of the object to be expunged.

  * If the destination object does not already exist,
    it is created. A newly created destination object
    has the same class as its source object (that is,
    moving a world creates a new world). For all Ada
    units, the destination object is created in the
    source state.
    
  Depending on the types of source and destination
  objects that are specified, the move command either
  moves the source object to the destination object
  (overwriting it or merging their contents) or it
  moves the source object into the destination object
  (provided that the destination object can contain
  other objects). The following table summarizes the
  "to" or "into" move operations that result from
  specifying various types of objects in the
  Destination and Source fields. The number in
  parentheses following the results indicates a
  restriction on the move. These restrictions are
  listed below the table.

------------------------------------------------------
|Source  |To     |To     |To     |To    |To    |To No |
|        |Non-Ada|Library|Subunit|World |Direc-|Object|
|        |Object |Unit   |       |      |tory  |      |
|        |       |       |       |      |      |      |
|        |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------
|Non-Ada |To (1) |Error  |Error  | Into | Into | To   |
|Object  |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------
|Library |Error  |To     |To     | Into | Into | To   |
|Unit (2)|       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------
|Subunit |Error  |Into   |To     | Into | Into | To   |
|(2)     |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------
|World   |Error  |Error  |Error  |To (4)|To (4)| To   |
|(3)     |       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------
|Direc-  |Error  |Error  |Error  |To (4)|To (4)| To   |
|tory (3)|       |       |       |      |      |      |
 -----------------------------------------------------

  1 The objects must be of the same class.

  2 The subunits of the unit are involved. The
    relative nesting of subunits is preserved.

  3 The subcomponents of the library are involved.
    The relative nesting of subcomponents is preserved.
 
  4 The contents of the Source library are merged
    with the contents of the Destination library.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual  
  procedure Library.Move
  procedure Library.Resolve 

Rational Access Help
  Resolve Filename
    


#Delete File
  File:Delete File destroys all versions of the
  specified object.
  
  Destroying an object is equivalent to deleting and
  expunging all versions of that object. A destroyed
  object cannot be recovered; recoverable deletions
  can be made with the Environment command
  Common.Delete or Library.Delete.
  
  Destroying an Ada unit also destroys subordinate
  units (bodies and subunits). A destroy operation is
  abandoned if it would cause the demotion of units
  outside the specified limit.
  
  The command provides for a threshold number (2) of
  dependent objects that can be destroyed along with
  each specified object. If the threshold is
  exceeded, the command abandons all destructions.
  The threshold serves as a safeguard against
  destroying too many objects.
 
  CAUTION: If the specified objects are under CMVC
  control, this command checks them in, makes them
  uncontrolled, and destroys them. No confirmation
  box is generated.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the object(s) to be destroyed.
  The object(s) can be a:

  * Text file
  * Ada unit
  * Mailbox
  * Library
  * Switch file   

  The default is the current selection, provided that
  it contains the cursor. Multiple objects can be
  specified using wildcards, context characters, set
  notation, indirect files, and attributes.
  
  If the object is something other than a command in
  a command window, a confirmation dialog box appears
  that lists what will be deleted, breaking down the
  objects by class and displaying a total for each
  class (see Access help for "Delete Confirm" for
  more information).
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Common.Edit
  procedure Common.Object.Delete

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Destroy

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Check_In
  procedure Cmvc.Destroy_Subsystem
  procedure Cmvc.Destroy_Views
  procedure Cmvc.Make_Uncontrolled


#Delete File Confirmation 
  The File:Delete Confirmation dialog box displays
  what object(s) will be destroyed. Objects are
  broken down by class, and a total for each class is
  displayed.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>OK
--
  Destroys the listed objects. If the object is under
  CMVC control, it is checked in (if necessary), made
  uncontrolled, and destroyed.


>>Cancel
------
  Cancels the command; no objects are destroyed,
  checked in, or made uncontrolled.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access Help
  Delete File

#Insert File
  File:Insert File inserts the named text file into
  the current Ada image at the current cursor
  position.

  No semantic analysis of the contents of the file or
  the resulting object is done.

  Specifically, this command has the following
  effects:

  * Ada images: Copies the contents of the text file
    specified in the Name entry box into the current
    Ada image at the current cursor position.

  * Command images: Copies the contents of the named
    text file into the command window at the current
    cursor position.

  * Text images: Inserts the named text file into the
    current text image at the current cursor position.
  
   
    
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>File to Insert
--------------
  Enter the name of the file to be inserted.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment
Reference Manual
  procedure Common.Insert_File
  

#Run Program 
  File:Run executes the specified command. This
  command compiles, links, and executes the Ada
  statements in the Command field. The Ada statements
  can be any series of statements that can be placed
  between a begin/end pair. (The begin/end pair is
  implicit.) If the default value of the Command
  field is used, the program designated by the
  selection is executed. The selection must be in an
  Ada unit or a library.
  
  The Ada statements must run to completion before
  this command completes; they are not run as a
  separate job.
  
  If an exception propagates out of the statements
  executed by this command, a message indicating the
  exception is written into the log file for the
  current job. The exception does not propagate to
  the caller.
 
  To create a new job and run the specified
  statements under that job, use the
  Program.Create_Job or program.Run_Job Environment
  procedures.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Command
-------
  Enter the name of the command or Ada unit you want
  to run.
   

>>Debug
-----
  Check this box to run the command under the
  debugger.
                 
  This command also creates a new job under which to
  execute the statements.


>>Alternate Machine
-----------------
  Enter the name of the remote R1000 on which to run
  the command. You cannot run the command under the
  debugger on a remote machine.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Session and Job Management (SJM) book of the Environ-
ment Reference Manual
    procedure Job.Connect
    procedure Program.Create_Job
    procedure Program.Run
    procedure Program.Run_Job
    procedure Remote.Run


#Commit Buffers
  The Commit Buffers dialog box is generated if you
  attempt to log out of your Rational session when
  there are objects that contain unsaved changes. An
  object with unsaved changes is indicated by an
  asterisk (*) in its window banner.
  
  From the Commit Buffers dialog box:
  
  * To save all the objects and log out of your
    Rational Environment session, click Commit.
  
  * To abandon all the objects without saving changes
    and log out of your Rational Environment session,
    click OK. The objects are reverted to their last
    saved version.
    
  * To return to your Environment session, from which
    you can selectively save or abandon individual
    objects, click Cancel. 
    

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual 
  procedure Editor.Quit




#Edit Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Cut
---
  Deletes the current Environment-selected region and
  pushes it onto the hold stack.


>>Copy
----
  Pushes the current Environment-selected region onto
  the hold stack.


>>Paste
-----
  Retrieves the top item in the hold stack, leaving
  that item on the hold stack. The retrieved item is
  copied into the current cursor location. 


>>Capitalize                 
----------
  Capitalizes the first letter in all the words in
  the selected region.


>>Uppercase
---------
  Converts all words in the selected region to
  uppercase.


>>Lowercase
---------
  Converts all words in the selected region to
  lowercase.


>>Make Into Comment
-----------------
  Puts comment characters (-- ) before the leftmost
  character of each line in the current
  Environment-selected region. If a line is already
  commented in that selection, additional comment
  characters (-- )are inserted in front of it.


>>Uncomment
---------
  Removes comment characters (-- ) from lines in
  which they are the leftmost three nonblank
  characters. This command does not remove comments
  from the end of lines that begin with Ada code.
  

>>Justify
-------
  Adjusts the placement of all words in the current
  Environment-selected region to justify the
  selection flush left between the left edge of the
  image and the defined right margin. The right
  margin is set by the Fill Column entry box in
  Edit:Typing Modes, or by editing the corresponding
  session switch. The default is 72.


>>Fill
----
  Adjusts the placement of all words in the current
  Environment-selected region to fill completely the
  column between the left edge of the image and the
  defined right margin. The right margin is set by
  the Fill Column entry box in Edit:Typing Modes, or
  by editing the corresponding session switch. The
  default is 72.


>>Search/Replace...
-----------------
  Allows you to search for strings and, if desired,
  replace those strings.
  
  See the "Search and Replace" topic for more
  information.


>>Typing Modes...
---------------
  Allows you to set overwrite or insert mode, to turn
  fill mode (right margin justification) on or off,
  and to specify a right margin.


>>Spelling=>
----------                     
  Allows you to check the spelling of a particular
  word or all words in an image, and to replace a
  misspelled word. You can also add words to the
  dictionary or specify strings to be skipped by the
  speller.

  See the "Edit Spelling Menu" topic for more
  information.
  

>>Underlines Off
--------------
  Removes all underlines from the current image.
  

>>Deselect
--------
  Clears any Environment selection that the
  Environment cursor is in. Deselect also removes any
  prompts in the image.
  

>>Add Entry
---------
  Inserts an entry into the designated activity file,
  searchlist, set of links, or other object.
                                              

>>Edit Entry
----------
  Allows you to change the designated activity file,
  searchlist, set of links, or other object,
  prompting for the new value in a command window.


>>Delete Entry
------------
  Deletes the specified entry from the designated
  activity file, searchlist, set of links, or other
  object. In a switch file, Delete Entry reverts the
  value of the entry to the system-default value.



#Search and Replace
  Edit:Search/Replace allows you to search an image
  for a specified string of text and, if desired,
  replace the string with a new specified string.


>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Search For 
----------   
  Enter the string to be searched for. The string can
  be literal or it can contain wildcard characters.
  

>>Change To
---------
  To replace text, enter the new string.
  

>>Search Options
--------------
  * Consider Case: Makes the search case-sensitive.
    If you do not have a switch file for your current
    session, this option is inoperative and appears
    grayed out.

  * Preserve Case: Keeps the case of the text as it
    finds it in the string that is being replaced. If
    you do not have a switch file for your current
    session, this option is inoperative and appears
    grayed out.

  * Wildcards: Treats wildcard characters in the
    Search For entry box as wildcards. When this
    option is not selected, all characters are
    treated as literal characters.

  * Current Selection: Searches only the text in the
    current Environment selection text.
  

>>Search Direction
----------------
  * Forward: Directs the search forward (down) in the
    object.

  * Backward: Directs the search backward (up) in the 
    object.
     

>>Search Button
------------- 
  Activate this button to search for the string
  specified in the Search For entry box. The
  Environment cursor will stop at the string; your
  view of the image will change accordingly. Activate
  the Search button again to go to the next
  occurrence of the string.
      

>>Replace Button
--------------
  After the Environment has located an occurrence of
  the string specified in the Search For entry box,
  activate this button to replace the string with the
  new string specified in the Change To entry box.


>>Replace & Search Button
-----------------------
  Activate this button to replace the string
  specified in the Search For entry box with the new
  string specified in the Change To entry box, and
  then traverse the Environment cursor to the next
  occurrence of the old string. Your view of the
  image will change accordingly.


>>Replace All Button
------------------
  Activate this button to replace all occurrences of
  the string (from the location of the Environment
  cursor to the beginning or end of the image,
  depending on the search direction) specified in the
  Search For entry box with new string specified in
  the Change To entry box.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Search

  
#Typing Modes
  Edit:Typing Modes allows you to set overwrite or
  insert mode, to turn fill mode (right margin
  justification) on or off, and to specify a right
  margin.
  
  Note that the options you set in this box only
  affect the image of the current object.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Overwrite Mode
--------------
  Click this radio button to type text over existing
  text.


>>Insert Mode
-----------
  Click this radio button to insert text at the
  location of the Environment cursor without
  overwriting existing text.
  

>>Fill Mode On
------------
  Check this box to turn on Fill Mode. Fill Mode
  automatically moves the Environment cursor to the
  next line when your entry reaches the specified
  fill column, whose default is 72 characters from
  the left margin.


>>Fill Column
-----------
  Enter the number of characters from the left margin
  where you want Fill Mode to take effect. The
  default fill column is 72. The Fill Mode On box
  must be checked for this setting to have any
  effect.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Editor.Set.Fill_Column
  procedure Editor.Set.Fill_Mode
  procedure Editor.Set.Insert_Mode
  

#Edit Spelling Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------

  The operations on the Edit:Spelling menu allow you
  to check the spelling of a particular word or all
  words in an image, and to replace a misspelled
  word. You can also add words to the dictionary or
  specify strings to be skipped by the speller.
  

>>Check Word
----------
  Checks the spelling of the word designated by the
  Environment cursor. If the word is not found, it
  will be underlined, and a list may appear in the
  message window of possible spellings for the word.
  

>>Check Image
-----------
  Checks the entire image for spelling mistakes. A
  message will appear in the message window, and all
  suspicious spellings will be underlined in the
  image. Use Edit:Spelling:Next Spelling Error to
  traverse to the next underlined word.
  

>>Replace Word
------------
  Replaces the word designated by the Environment
  cursor with the first alternative suggested by the
  Environment's dictionary.
  

>>Add Word To Dictionary
----------------------
  Enters the word designated by the Environment
  cursor to the Environment dictionary. Further
  occurrences of the word will not be underlined as
  errors.
  

>>Learn Replacement
-----------------
  Trains the spelling checker to correct certain
  spelling errors automatically.
                        

>>Next Spelling Error
-------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next underlined
  spelling error. Your view moves accordingly.


#Navigate Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Definition
----------
  Shows the definition or contents of the object
  designated by the Environment cursor.
  

>>Enclosing
---------
  Shows the enclosing (parent) library or object of
  the object designated by the Environment cursor.
  

>>Other Part
----------
  Displays the Ada specification if the current
  object is a body, and the Ada body if the current
  object is a specification.
  

>>Next Underline
--------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next underlined
  error or reference indicator. Your view moves
  accordingly.
  

>>Previous Underline
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the previous
  underlined error or reference indicator. Your view
  moves accordingly.
  

>>Next Item
---------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next underline
  or prompt. Your view moves accordingly.
  

>>Previous Item
-------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the previous
  underline or prompt. Your view moves accordingly.
  

>>Top of Region
-------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the beginning of
  the current Environment-selected region.
  

>>Bottom of Region
----------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the end of the
  current Environment-selected region.
  

>>Resolve Name...
---------------
  Resolves the specified name by finding the object
  or objects it references and then displaying the
  fully qualified pathnames of those objects.
  

>>Home Library
------------
  Displays your home library.

  
#Resolve Name 
  Navigate:Resolve Name resolves the specified name
  by finding the object or objects it references and
  then displaying the fully qualified pathnames of
  those objects.

  This command is especially useful for evaluating
  names containing wildcards, context characters, and
  substitution characters.

  The command attempts to resolve the specified name
  by looking through the objects listed in
  Environment libraries. Thus, only library units or
  subunits can be resolved.

  Note that the Resolve Name command displays the
  fully qualified pathname of an object only if you
  have at least read access to the world enclosing
  that object.

  The job display is sent to Current_Output (by
  default, an Environment output window). Errors are
  reported in log messages, which, by default, are
  also sent to the output window.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name to be resolved. The default is the
  name that is currently highlighted. Note that this
  can be a highlighted text string or a selected
  object.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------
 
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Library.Resolve
    

#Program Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Format
------
  Formats the current image appropriately for its
  image type.

  For Ada units, this command checks the syntax of
  the image, performs syntactic completion, and
  pretty-prints.


>>Complete
--------
  Completes the designated item by inserting new text
  and prompts into the image using information about
  the syntax and semantics of the image type.
  

>>Semanticize
-----------
  Checks the image in the current window to ensure
  that it is correct according to the syntax and
  semantic rules for the type of the image and
  indicates any errors.
  

>>Promote
-------
  Promotes the designated item to the next higher
  state.
  

>>Promote to Coded...
-------------------
  Promotes the designated Ada unit to the coded
  state.
  

>>Promote to Installed...
-----------------------
  Promotes the designated Ada unit to the installed
  state.
  

>>Promote to Source...
--------------------
  Promotes the designated archived Ada unit to the
  source state.
  

>>Demote
------
  Demotes the designated item to the next lower
  state.
  

>>Demote to Installed...
----------------------
  Demotes the designated Ada unit to the installed
  state.
  

>>Demote to Source...
-------------------
  Demotes the designated Ada unit to the source
  state.
  

>>Demote to Archived...
---------------------
  Demotes the designated Ada unit to the archived
  state.
  

>>Incremental=>
-------------
  Allows for incremental operations in installed or
  coded Ada units. You can incrementally:

  * Insert statements, declarations or other elements

  * Edit statements, declarations or other elements

  * Promote the edited statements, declarations or
    other elements back to the installed or coded state

  * Delete statements, declarations or other elements
  

>>Show Usage
----------
  Displays a list of the actual usages of the
  specified declaration.
    

>>Show Unused
-----------
  Shows the declarations that are not referenced in
  the specified Ada unit.
  

>>Build=>
-------
  Provides commands for:

  * Creating a loaded main program

  * Parsing source files

  * Inserting a template for the private part of the
    current package visible part.

  * Inserting a template for the body of the named
    visible part, the selected visible part, or the
    visible part in the current window.

  * Changing the selected subprogram from an in-line
    program unit to a separate subunit.

  * Changes the subunit in the image or selected
    subunit stub from a subunit to an in-line program
    unit.

  * Withdraws the stub (library entry for) of the
    named Ada unit, the selected Ada unit from its
    parent, or the Ada unit in the current window and
    demotes the unit to the source state.


>>Compiler Switches
-----------------
  Creates a window in which to edit the set of
  switches from the library switch file associated
  with the current library.
  
  

#Promote
  Program:Promote raises one or more Ada units to the
  indicated unit state.
  
  Compiling a program in the Environment consists of
  promoting all of its units from the source state
  (or the archived state) through the installed state
  to the coded state, at which point the unit can be
  executed. You can promote units to either the next
  higher unit state or directly to a specific unit
  state.
  
  Note that to ensure semantic consistency, the Ada
  units that compose a program must be promoted in
  the order specified by the Reference Manual for the
  Ada Programming Language. In general:
  
  * A unit specification must be promoted before any
    units that depend on (with) it.
                               
  * A unit specification must be promoted before its
    corresponding body.
    
  * A unit body must be promoted before its subunits.
    (Note that when promoting to the coded state, a
    package subunit, generic package subunit, or task
    subunit must be promoted before its parent body.)

  The Environment maintains databases of dependencies
  between units that allow it to compute the
  compilation order. If an attempted state change
  would violate compilation-order rules, the
  operation is rejected and the state change does not
  take place. Furthermore, Access commands determine
  the additional units that need to be promoted to
  maintain semantic consistency and usually attempt
  to promote them accordingly.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the unit to be promoted.
  
  To promote all the units in a library, specify the
  name of that library.
  
  To promote multiple units, specify an appropriate
  naming expression using set notation ( [unit1,
  unit2] ) or the standard wildcard characters for
  specifying pathnames:
  
  #  matches any single character

  @  matches zero or more characters

  ?  matches zero or more nonworld name components

  ?? matches zero or more name components, including 
     worlds
   

>>Goal State
----------
  * Coded: Promotes the unit to the coded state. 

  * Installed: Promotes the unit to the installed
    state.

  * Source: Promotes the archived unit to the source
    state.
  

>>Limit Compilation To
--------------------
  * This World/View Only: Limits compilation to only
    objects in the current world or subsystem view.
    
  * No Limit on Compilation: Allows compilation to
    include everything in the closure.
    

>>Compile
-------
  * This Unit Only: Compiles only the named unit
    (with no prerequisites).
    
  * This And All Prerequisite Specs: Compiles the
    named unit and any prerequisite specs needed for
    compilation.
    
  * ...And All Subunits: Compiles the named unit and
    its subunits (including all prerequisite specs).
      
  * ...And All Units Needed To Execute: Compiles the
    named unit and all subunits and prerequisite bodies
    specs needed for execution.

    
>>Log To
------
  * Window: Displays the log of the compilation in an
    I/O window.
    
  * File: Routes the log to a file. The Environment
    will create a default text file, or you can edit
    the filename in the File entry box.
    

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  package Compilation
    
    
#Demote
  Program:Demote lowers the specified Ada units to
  the indicated unit state.
  
  Demoting units is the counterpart to promoting
  them. Whereas promoting a unit raises it to a
  higher state, demoting a unit changes the state of
  the unit to a lower state. For example, changing a
  unit from the coded to the installed state entails
  demoting the unit. There are two main reasons for
  demoting a unit:
  
  * To edit the unit. Demoting a unit to the
    installed state allows you to edit it using
    incremental operations. Demoting a unit to the
    source state allows you to arbitrarily edit it
    using basic text-editing operations.

  * To allow the demotion or deletion of another unit
    (specifically, a unit "withed" by the specified
    unit), thus preserving semantic consistency and
    maintaining the compilation order.
 
  To demote all the units in a library, specify the
  name of the library to be demoted.

  As when promoting units, the Ada units that compose
  a program must be demoted in the order specified by
  the Reference Manual for the Ada Programming
  Language.
 
  
>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the Ada unit to be demoted. By
  default, the current Ada unit is listed.
  
  To demote multiple units, specify an appropriate
  naming expression using set notation ( [unit1,
  unit2] ) or the standard wildcard characters for
  specifying pathnames:
  
  #  matches any single character

  @  matches zero or more characters

  ?  matches zero or more nonworld name components

  ?? matches zero or more name components, including 
     worlds


>>Goal State 
----------
  * Installed: Demotes the Ada unit to the installed
    state.

  * Source: Demotes the Ada unit to the source state.

  * Archived: Demotes the Ada unit to the archived
    state.


>>Demote Only If Demotion Affects
-------------------------------
  * This Unit Only: Demotes only the named Ada unit.
  
  * Only Units In The Same World Or View: Demotes
    only the named Ada unit and its prerequisite
    units in the current world or subsystem view.
    
  * Any Ada Units Anywhere: Demotes the named Ada
    unit and all of its prerequisite units anywhere.
        

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Common.Promote

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Compilation.Promote


#Program Incremental Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------

  The Program:Incrmental submenu provides commands
  for making incremental changes to installed and
  coded Ada units. For more information see the
  Rational Access User's Guide, the Rational
  Environment User's Guide, and the Editing Specific
  Types (EST) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual.


>>Incremental Insert
------------------
  Creates an insertion point in installed and coded
  units where statements, declarations, other
  elements on which incremental compilation
  operations are supported, or an entire compilation
  unit can be inserted into the current element.
  

>>Incremental Edit
----------------
  Creates a window in which to edit the selected Ada
  construct. 
  
  If there is no selection or if the current
  selection is for an entire compilation unit or
  subunit declaration, the command creates a window
  in which to edit the unit, if necessary, and
  demotes the unit to source if no units depend on
  the unit. If there are dependent units, a list of
  them is displayed in the menu window that is
  brought onto the screen, and the operation fails.
  If the operation succeeds, a write lock is acquired
  on the unit.

  If there is a selection other than the entire unit
  and if incremental compilation is allowed on the
  element selected (see the rules on incremental
  compilation stated above), this command removes the
  element from the parent unit, replaces it with an
  insertion point, and brings up a new window with
  the element in it.
  
  
>>Incremental Promote
-------------------
  Promotes the designated item to the next higher
  state. This command causes the elements in the
  window to be inserted in the parent and the window
  is deleted.


>>Incremental Delete
------------------
  Deletes the selected element. If other elements are
  dependent on the element because of semantic
  references (from installed or coded units), the
  deletion fails and a menu of the dependent units is
  displayed in the menu window. See the description
  of the editing operations on menus in the Editing
  Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual for more information. Contained
  units of the selected element are not deleted. The
  cursor must be in the selection for the operation
  to succeed.



  
#Program Build Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------

  The Program:Build submenu provides commands for
  loading coded main programs and for creating Ada
  units from related Ada units or text files. For
  more information see the Rational Access User's
  Guide, the Rational Environment User's Guide, and
  the Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the
  Environment Reference Manual.


>>Load...
-------
  Creates a loaded main program from the specified
  coded main program.
 

>>Parse Source Files...
---------------------
  Scans the contents of the named files, searching
  for compilation units, and creates those units. The
  newly created units are of class Ada and therefore
  have the underlying structured (DIANA)
  representation characteristic of units in the
  Environment. The units are created in the source
  state.


>>Build Private Part 
------------------
  Inserts a template for the private part of the
  current package visible part.

  This command creates the private region of the
  package. It has no effect if the private part
  already exists and contains all of the declared
  private types. The command applies recursively to
  enclosed packages. A prompt is left for the
  completion of each private type or deferred
  constant.
       

>>Build Body
----------
  Inserts a template for the body of the named
  visible part, the selected visible part, or the
  visible part in the current window.

  This command builds a template for the body of the
  currently selected or named visible part or the
  visible part in the current window. The template is
  brought up in a new window, and prompts are
  provided for statements that must be completed. Any
  "with" clauses that exist in the visible part are
  copied into the body template.
 

>>Make Separate
-------------
  Changes the selected subprogram from an in-line
  program unit to a separate subunit.

  This command replaces the body with a "separate"
  clause and creates a separate library entry
  containing the body for the unit.
 

>>Make Inline
-----------
  Changes the subunit in the image or selected
  subunit stub from a subunit to an in-line program
  unit.

  This command removes the "separate" clause and
  moves the body for the subunit into the parent
  unit. The library entry for the subunit is removed
  from the library structure.


>>Withdraw
--------
  Withdraws the stub (library entry for) of the named
  Ada unit, the selected Ada unit from its parent, or
  the Ada unit in the current window and demotes the
  unit to the source state.

  The stub is replaced with an insertion point.

     

#Load Main Program
  Program:Build:Load creates a loaded main program
  from the specified coded main program.

  This help describes:
  
  * What a loaded main program is

  * Saving, copying, and restoring loaded main
    programs
    
  * Consistency between loaded main programs and their
    source
    
  * Options in the Program:Build:Loaded Main Program
    dialog box


>>What is a Loaded Main Program?
------------------------------  
  A loaded main program is an executable program that
  does not depend on its source code; that is, a
  loaded main program does not become obsolete if the
  source code from which it was created is modified.
  Furthermore, a loaded main program can be moved
  between R1000s without having to move and recompile
  its source code.

  Loaded main programs are created from coded main
  programs, which are main subprograms that contain
  pragma Main and that have been promoted to the
  coded state. The resulting loaded main program is
  comprised of a valid Ada specification (that can be
  utilized by other programs) and a separate,
  self-contained copy of the main program's code
  segments, similar to an executable module on other
  computer systems. The Program:Build:Load command
  automatically inserts the Loaded_Main pragma in
  place of the Main pragma in the newly created Ada
  specification. Furthermore, this command converts
  the object's subclass from Main_Proc or Main_Func
  to Load_Proc or Load_Func.


>>Saving, Copying, and Resoring Loaded Main Programs
--------------------------------------------------
  Because loaded main programs have a valid Ada
  specification, you should use care when saving,
  copying, or restoring them. In particular, if the
  Ada specification contains "with" clauses that
  reference other packages, those packages must be
  visible (through links or imports) from any location
  to which the loaded main program is copied or
  restored.


>>Consistency Between Loaded Main Programs And Source
---------------------------------------------------
  Because its code segments are independent of its
  source code, a loaded main program is unaffected by
  demoting, and even changing, the source code. Thus,
  consistency between a loaded main program and its
  source code may be lost. Furthermore, loaded main
  programs, like code views, can be debugged using the
  Rational debugger only if the same version of the
  original source code still exists in the same
  location on the same R1000 and is still in the coded
  state.

  See Chapter 4, "Compiling and Executing Main
  Programs," in the Library Management (LM) book of
  the Environment Reference Manual and Appendix F for
  the R1000 Target in the Ada LRM for more
  information about pragma Loaded_Main and pragma
  Main.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Main Program Name
-----------------
  Enter the name of the coded main program from which
  the loaded main program is to be created. The
  specified main program must be in the coded state.
  The default is the current context.
  
  
>>Load Proc/Func Name
-------------------
  Enter the name of the loaded main program to be
  created.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Compilation.Load
    
    
#Parse Source Files
  Program:Build:Parse Source Files scans the contents
  of the named files, searching for compilation
  units, and creates those units. The newly created
  units are of class Ada and therefore have the
  underlying structured (DIANA) representation
  characteristic of units in the Environment. The
  units are created in the source state.

  The specified files can contain any number of
  Ada-unit specifications and/or bodies. However, the
  image of each file must be Ada source for
  compilation as defined by Section 10.1 of the
  Reference Manual for the Ada Programming Language.
  If no unit name can be determined from the input,
  the unit is created with a temporary name. If a
  specified file contains any syntactic or semantic
  error, no Ada unit is created.

  Existing Ada units that have the same name as a
  newly created unit are made obsolete and are
  deleted from the library. The original text file
  remains unchanged.

  This command is useful when transporting Ada source
  code from another host to the Rational Environment.
  In that case, source code is loaded into text files
  in a library in the Environment. These files are
  then transformed into parsed Ada units using this
  command.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Source File(s)
--------------
  Enter the name of the text file that contains Ada
  units to be parsed. Multiple units can be specified
  using wildcards, context prefixes, indirect files,
  set notation, and attributes. The default is the
  selected region.
  
  
>>Destination Library
-------------------
  Enter the library (directory, world, or view) in
  which to create the parsed Ada units. Wildcards,
  attributes, and context characters can be used in
  this name if the name resolves unambiguously to a
  single location. The default is the current
  library.

 
>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Library Management (LM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Compilation.Parse
  
#CMVC Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Check Out...
------------ 
  Reserves the right to modify the specified
  controlled object or objects by acquiring the
  objects' reservation tokens. Controlled objects can
  be modified only while they are checked out. When
  objects are joined across multiple views, they
  share the same reservation token, so that only one
  of the joined objects can be checked out at a time.
  Checking out a joined object in one view renders
  the corresponding objects in the other views
  unavailable for update.


>>Check In...
-----------
  Releases the reserved right to modify the specified
  controlled object or objects by releasing the
  objects' reservation tokens. When you have finished
  modifying a controlled object, you should check in
  the object so that:
  
  * The changes are available to other views.
  
  * The changes you made are recorded in the CMVC
    database.

  * The object cannot be modified until it is checked
    out again.


>>Accept Changes...
-----------------
  Updates the specified object(s) to the same
  generation(s) of the specified corresponding
  object(s). The updated objects are changed to
  reflect any modifications that have been made to
  the corresponding objects.

  Accepting changes is useful is you want to:

  * Synchronize the development of controlled objects
    that are joined to objects in other views.

  * Update out-of-date objects to the latest
    generation.

  * "Go backward in time" to a previous generation of
    a controlled object that is joined to a less
    recently updated object in another view.
  
  * Copy new controlled objects between views.


>>Abandon
------- 
  If the current object is checked out, abandons the
  reservation on that object, effectively canceling
  the checkout. Any changes made during the canceled
  checkout are discarded and the object is reverted
  to the last checked-in generation. If necessary,
  the demotes Ada units. Any units that are demoted
  in the process of reverting units to the last
  check-in generation remain demoted; they are not
  repromoted.


>>Join...
-------
  Joins the specified controlled objects to the
  corresponding objects in the designated view.

  When objects are joined across views, they form a
  join set. Objects in a join set have the same
  pathname within their respective views and share a
  single reservation token, so that only one object
  in the set can be checked out at a time. Thus,
  joining allows synchronized changes to an object
  when there are instances of the same object in
  multiple working views.


>>Sever...
--------
  Severs the specified object(s) from their
  respective join sets. When an object is severed, it
  is given a different reservation token, so that it
  can be checked out and modified independent of the
  objects to which it had previously been joined.


>>Imports/Model...
----------------
  Displays and allows you to change the imports and
  model for one or more views. A view's imports
  determine the objects in other views that are
  visible to objects in the current view. A view's
  model determines the view's target key and initial
  library-switch file.


>>CMVC Editor
----------- 
  Displays a configuration image for the designated
  view or configuration object or for the view
  enclosing the designated object. A configuration
  image for a view is a library-like display of CMVC
  information pertaining to that view. The initial
  display:

  * Contains an entry for each controlled object in
    the view.
  
  * Indicates the generation number for each object
    in the view. A two-part generation indicates that
    the specified view does not have the most current
    generation (for example, 4/8 indicates generation
    4 of 8).

  From this display, you can obtain more information
  about each object such as date and user who last
  modified it, by pressing [Expand] (generally bound
  to [Meta][!]). To display the release history for
  the view, press [Explain] (generally bound to
  [F3]). From this display, you can also perform
  common and CMVC operations on the objects listed.
  
  Note that CMVC Editor can be used to display a
  configuration image for a configuration object that
  has no view associated with it (for example, a
  configuration release). In this case, the
  configuration image provides access to generation
  images and history images even for objects that may
  not still exist outside the CMVC database. This is
  a useful means for browsing past generations of
  objects. Similarly, the CMVC Editor can be used to
  display configuration images for code views, which
  do not contain source objects.


>>Control/Uncontrol...
--------------------
  Determines whether the specified object(s) are
  controlled by the CMVC system and therefore subject
  to reservation. Any object in a subsystem can be
  controlled.
  
  Controlling an object associates a reservation
  token with it. The CMVC:Check In and CMVC:Check Out
  commands operate by manipulating reservation
  tokens, and joined objects share not only the same
  name but also a single reservation token.


>>Revert to Generation...
-----------------------
  Returns the specified controlled CMVC object or
  objects to the specified generation. More
  specifically, this command replaces the contents of
  each specified object with the contents of the
  indicated generation of that object.

  The generation to which an object is reverted can
  be retained as the latest generation, or the
  reverted object can be updated to the latest
  generation the next time the object is checked out.
  
  This command will demote Ada units, if necessary in
  order to revert the specified objects to the
  specified generation. It does not repromote units
  that were demoted in the process of reverting the
  specified objects.


>>CMVC Report=>
-------------
  Provides commands for displaying information about
  the controlled objects in the current view.


>>Activity
-------- 
  Opens a window containing the activity file
  associated with your current session.

  An activity maintains a mapping between subsystems
  and pairs of views. The pair consists of a spec
  view and a load view from that subsystem. An
  activity typically is used to specify an
  implementation from each subsystem to be used for
  execution.

  From the window displayed by this command you can
  add, edit, or delete entries using commands from
  the Edit menu or from Environment package
  !Commands.Common.

  Changes to activities are not made permanent until
  committed. When an activity is changed, but not yet
  committed, the # symbol appears in the window
  banner. Committing the activity makes all changes
  to the activity permanent, and the = symbol appears
  in the window banner.
  
  For more information, see package Activity in the
  Project Management (PM) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.

#Check Out
  CMVC:Check Out reserves the right to modify the
  specified controlled object or objects by acquiring
  the objects' reservation tokens.

  Controlled objects can be modified only while they
  are checked out. However, objects need not be
  checked out in order to be compiled.

  This help discusses:
  
  * Objects joined across views
  * Generations
  * Demotion and recompilation
  * Finding out about controlled objects
  * Options in the CMVC:Check Out dialog box
  

>>Objects Joined Across Views
---------------------------  
  When objects are joined across multiple views, they
  share the same reservation token, so that only one
  of the joined objects can be checked out at a time.
  Checking out a joined object in one view renders
  the corresponding objects in the other views
  unavailable for update. (In contrast, objects that
  do not share the same reservation token can be
  checked out and modified independently.) If the
  command encounters an object that is checked out in
  another view, an error is reported that point and
  the command quits without looking at any more
  objects. Checkouts made before the command quits
  are abandoned.


>>Generations
-----------
  A new generation of an object is created when it is
  checked out. The new generation can be preserved by
  the CMVC:Check In command or abandoned by the
  CMVC:Abandon command. When one object in a join set
  is checked out and then checked in, the other
  objects in the set are rendered at least one
  generation out of date. You cannot check out
  out-of-date objects without bringing them up to the
  current generation. You can bring out-of-date
  objects up to date during the check out process by
  choosing the Automatic Accept Latest Generation
  box.
  

>>Demotion and Recompilation
--------------------------
  If Ada units are compiled against a unit that
  requires updating, checking out that unit may
  require the demotion of the other dependent units.
  In this case, the Automatic Demotion If Needed box
  controls whether the command actually performs the
  demotion and checks out the unit.


>>Finding Out About Controlled Objects
------------------------------------
  Commands on the CMVC:CMVC Report submenu can be
  used to determine whether objects are out-of-date
  (List Out-of-Date Objects) or currently checked out
  (List All Checked Out). Other related information,
  such as the checkout date, time, and user, can be
  displayed using the CMVC:CMVC Report:Object History
  Information command.

  For more information about reservation tokens and
  checking objects out, see the Project Management
  (PM) book of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name(s) of the objects(s) that are to be
  checked out. You can specify multiple objects by
  using wildcards, context characters, special names,
  set notation, or indirect files. If you specify
  multiple objects, all the objects must belong to
  the same view. If you specify a view name, the
  command attempts to check out all the objects in
  the view.
  
  Objects must be controlled to be checked out. If
  uncontrolled objects are named, they are noted in
  the output log generated by the command.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter the comments to be stored in the CMVC
  database with the notes for the specified
  object(s). The specified comments also are logged
  to the default work order for the current session.
  These comments appear in the display produced by
  the CMVC:CMVC Report:Object History Information
  command. They can also be displayed using the
  Cmvc.Get_Notes command.
  

>>Automatic Demotion If Needed
----------------------------
  If the specified object was last checked out in
  another view, it must be updated to the latest
  generation before it can be checked out. Updating
  the object may call for demoting specified or
  dependent Ada units.

  Choose this box to allow the command to demote Ada
  units in order to update the specified objects to
  the latest generation. If this box is checked, the
  command is permitted to demote Ada units if
  necessary. The command does not recompile any units
  that were demoted. If this box is not checked, the
  command proceeds only if no demotion is required;
  otherwise, an error is reported and the command
  quits.
  
  Choosing this box has no effect if Automatic Accept
  Latest Generation is not chosen.


>>Automatic Accept Latest Generation
----------------------------------
  If the specified object was last checked out in
  another view, it must be updated to the latest
  generation before it can be checked out.

  Choose this box to allow the command to update the
  specified objects to the latest generation. If this
  box is checked, the command is permitted to update
  the objects. If it is not checked, the command
  proceeds only if the specified objects are already
  the latest generation; otherwise, an error is
  reported and the command quits.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Check_Out  

#Check In
  CMVC:Check In releases the reserved right to modify
  the specified controlled object or objects by
  releasing the objects' reservation tokens.

  When you have finished modifying a controlled
  object, you should check in the object so that:
  
  * The changes are available to other views.
  
  * The changes you made are recorded in the CMVC
    database.

  * The object cannot be modified until it is checked
    out again.

  Because checked-in objects cannot be modified in
  any way, it is recommended that all incremental
  additions or changes to Ada units be promoted
  before those units are checked in. Errors will
  result from attempting to compile the checked-in
  units that contain insertion points, because
  promoting insertion points would require the
  modification of checked-in units.

  Note that checking in an object that was made
  controlled without saving source simply releases
  the right to update that object; no text is
  recorded in the CMVC database.
  
  For more information about reservation tokens and
  checking in objects, see the Project Management
  (PM) book of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the object or objects to be
  checked in. Multiple objects can be specified by
  using wildcards, context characters, special names,
  set notation, or an indirect file.

  These objects must be controlled. If uncontrolled
  objects are named, they are noted in the output log
  generated by the command and ignored. To make
  objects controlled, use CMVC:Control/Uncontrol.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter the comments to be stored in the CMVC
  database with the notes for the specified
  object(s). The specified comments also are logged
  to the default work order for the current session.
  These comments appear in the display produced by
  the CMVC:CMVC Report:Object History Information
  command. They can also be displayed using the
  Cmvc.Get_Notes command.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Check_In


#Accept Changes
  CMVC: Accept Changes updates the object(s)
  specified in the Units to Update option to the
  generation(s) indicated by the Update From option;
  that is, the Units to Update are changed to reflect
  any modifications that have been made to the
  corresponding Update From objects.

  Accepting changes is useful is you want to:

  * Synchronize the development of controlled objects
    that are joined to objects in other views.

    When an object in a join set is checked out and
    then checked in, a new generation is created,
    rendering the other objects in the set at least
    one generation out of date. This command can be
    used on the out-of-date objects to update them to
    the latest generation.

  * Update out-of-date objects to the latest
    generation.

  * "Go backward in time" to a previous generation of
    a controlled object that is joined to a less
    recently updated object in another view.
  
  * Copy new controlled objects between views.

  Note that when changes to individual Ada units are
  being accepted, unit specifications should be
  updated before their corresponding bodies to ensure
  that the units compile correctly.


>>Demotion and Recompilation
--------------------------  
  If Ada units are compiled against a specified unit,
  accepting changes to that unit may require the
  demotion of the other dependent units. If
  necessary, the Accept Changes command demotes such
  units. It does not recompile the units.


>>Finding Out About Controlled Objects
------------------------------------
  Commands on the CMVC:CMVC Report submenu can be
  used to determine whether objects are out-of-date
  (List Out-of-Date Objects) or currently checked out
  (List All Checked Out). Other related information,
  such as the checkout date, time, and user, can be
  displayed using the CMVC:CMVC Report:Object History
  Information command.

  For more information about accepting changes
  between views, see the Project Management (PM) book
  of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>View to Update
--------------
  Enter the name of the view into which changes are
  to be accepted. Only a single view can be
  specified.


>>Units to Update
---------------
  Choose the set of objects (within the View to
  Update) into which changes are to be accepted:
  
  * To update all the controlled objects in the View
    to Update, check the All (and add new units)
    radio button. For each controlled object in the
    view specified in the Update From field that is
    not already in the View to Update, the command
    also adds a new, corresponding controlled object
    in the View to Update.
  
  * To update only a specified set of objects within
    the view, enter the names of those objects in the
    entry box and check the radio button next to the
    box. You can specify multiple objects by using
    wildcards, context characters, special names, set
    notation, or an indirect file.

  The specified objects must be controlled and
  checked in. If uncontrolled objects are named, they
  are noted in the output log generated by the
  command. If a named object is checked out, it is
  not updated and a warning message is issued.
  
  If an object to be updated was made controlled
  without saving source, the object can be updated
  only if the Update From field names an object that
  exists in some view. (For example, when updating
  such an object, the Update From field may not name
  a configuration object that has no view associated
  with it.)

  
>>Update From
-----------
  Enter the view from which the corresponding View to
  Update and Units to Update are to be updated:

  * To accept changes from the latest generation of
    each controlled object, check Latest. If the View
    to Update already contains the latest generation
    of a particular object, that object will not be
    updated.

  * To accept changes from a particular view or
    configuration, check View or Configuration and
    select the view or configuration from the list on
    the right. If the view or configuration from
    which you want to accept changes is not in the
    list, you can enter its name directly in the
    Selected View or Configuration entry box.

  If Update From names a view, and

  * Units to Update specifies All (and add new
    units), every controlled object in the Update
    From view updates the corresponding object in the
    View to Update. New controlled objects in the
    Update From view are copied into the View to
    Update. The copied objects are automatically
    controlled and joined to the corresponding
    objects in the Update From view.

  * Units to Update specifies a particular set of
    objects, the command updates the Units to Update
    to match the corresponding objects in the Update
    From view.
 
  Naming a configuration is the same as naming a
  view, except that naming a view always updates the
  Units to Update to more recent generations, whereas
  naming a configuration can change the Units to
  Update to older generations. (The name of a
  previously release view cannot be used in place of
  a configuration to go back in time.)
  
  Note that changing the Units to Update to an older
  generation does not cause that generation to become
  the latest one. Checking out such an object updates
  it to the latest generation.

  If an Update From object is currently checked out,
  it's previous generation is used and a warning
  message appears in the output log.


>>Restrict to Units
-----------------
  If you want to restrict the objects from which to
  accept changes, enter those objects in the Restrict
  to Units entry box.

  Multiple objects can be specified by using
  wildcards, context characters, special names, set
  notation, or an indirect file. Note that
  subdirectories (for example, Units) are not
  accepted as object names; instead you must use
  naming expressions that resolve to the contents of
  such subdirectories (for example, Units.@). If this
  entry box is empty, all objects from the specified
  view or configuration are assumed.

  When a set of objects are specified in the Restrict
  to Units entry box, the Units to Update should
  specify All (and add new units).


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Accept_Changes


#Join Controlled CMVC Objects
  CMVC:Join joins the specified controlled objects to
  the corresponding objects in the designated view.

  When a team of developers needs to work on objects
  in the same subsystem, multiple development views
  (paths or subpaths) are usually set up. Such views
  usually are created such that the objects in them
  are joined automatically. Joining objects in
  different views facilitates parallel development
  because objects that are joined:

  * Share a single reservation token. Consequently, a
    joined object can be checked out in only one view
    at a time.

  * Are represented as a single series of generations
    stored in the CMVC database. Consequently,
    changes make to one object can be propagated to
    the other objects to which it is joined.

  If views are set up such that the objects in them
  are not automatically joined, you can join two
  objects using the Join command provided that:

  * The objects have the same pathname within their
    respective views.

  * The objects to be joined are textually identical.
    The Cmvc.Merge_Changes Environment command can be
    used to prepare objects for joining.

  Note that if the object is currently joined, it
  will first be severed. Thus, joining an object A in
  view V1 to view V2 is not necessarily the same as
  joining the corresponding object A in view V2 to
  view V1.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Sever the following objects
---------------------------
  Enter the name of the object(s) to be joined to the
  corresponding object(s) in another view. Multiple
  objects can be specified by using wildcards,
  context characters, special names, set notation, or
  an indirect file.

  Note that the named objects must be controlled and
  must be textually identical to the corresponding
  objects to which they are to be joined. 

  If you name an object that already belongs to a
  join set, the Join command implicitly severs that
  object from its original join set before joining
  the object to the new join set.


>>Then join to corresponding objects in view
------------------------------------------
  Enter the name of the view that contains the
  objects to which the specified objects are to be
  joined. Objects in the specified view must be
  checked in.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Join

#Sever Controlled CMVC Objects
  CMVC:Sever severs the specified object(s) from
  their respective join sets.

  If two users need concurrent access a controlled
  object, you can sever the object between views.
  Severing provides each copy of the object with its
  own reservation token, so that each copy can be
  checked out independently. Separate sets of
  generations are kept for severed objects.

  When an object is severed, it is given a different
  reservation token, so that it can be checked out
  and modified independent of the objects to which it
  had previously been joined.
  
  The name of the new reservation token is
  automatically generated by the Environment.
  Automatically generated names of reservation tokens
  are derived from the view portion of the enclosing
  view name (up to the first underscore character).
  For example, the severed objects in a view called
  Rev1_Working would have "Rev1" as the
  automatically-generated name of the reservation
  token. However, if "Rev1" is currently in use, then
  "Rev1_1" is used.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Objects
-------
  Enter the name of the object(s) to be severed from
  their join sets. Multiple objects can be specified
  by using wildcards, context characters, special
  names, set notation, or an indirect file. If a view
  is specified, all the objects in the view are
  severed.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Sever


#Imports/Model
  CMVC:Imports/Model displays and allows you to
  change the imports and model for one or more views.

  A view's imports determine the objects in other
  views that are visible to objects in the current
  view. A view's model determines the view's target
  key and initial library-switch file.

  The Imports/Model command can be used to:
  
  * Add new imports

  * Change an existing import by importing a
    different view from the same subsystem

  * Refresh a view's existing imports after new
    specifications have been added to the imported
    views
    
  * Remove existing imports
  
  * Change a view's model, and thereby:

    - Invoke a new switches file for the view.

    - Rebuild the view's links.

    - Reset the number of levels for automatic name
      generation for release and spec views.

    - Change the view's target key.
    
  This help describes consistency checking of imports,
  import and export restrictions, demotion and
  recompilation, and the options in the
  CMVC:Imports/Model dialog box.
    

>>Consistency Checking
--------------------
  This command performs consistency checking to
  ensure that no view directly or indirectly imports
  more than one view from the same subsystem. It
  checks the closure of the view named in the View
  Name entry box and the closures of all views that
  import it. An error results if any new or changed
  import would cause an inconsistency.

  Furthermore, within spec/load subsystems,
  circularity checking is done to ensure that no view
  directly or indirectly imports itself. (Circular
  importing is permitted among views in combined
  subsystems, however.)

  An import operation succeeds only if the target key
  of the importing (client) view is compatible with
  the target key of the imported (supplier) view. For
  example, a view with target key R1000 cannot import
  a view with target key Mc68020_Bare.


>>Import/Export Restrictions
--------------------------  
  An import operation will create links to a subset
  of the units in a supplier view if export and
  import restrictions exist. Users create export and
  import restrictions as text files in the supplier
  and client views, respectively.


>>Demotion and Recompilation
--------------------------
  This command does not recompile any units that were
  demoted when imports were added to, changed in, or
  removed from the view.
  
  For more information about imports, exports, and
  working in subsystems, see the Project Management
  (PM) book of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>View Name
---------
  Enter the name of the view(s) for which the model
  or imports are to be changed. You can specify a
  spec, load, or combined view. Multiple views can be
  specified using wildcards, context characters,
  special names, set notation, or an indirect file.

  If both the View Name and Add/Change Imports views
  name the same set of combined views, the named
  views import each other.

  Note that to replace the model, all units in the
  view must be in the source state.


>>Current Imports
---------------
  Lists all of the views that are imported by the
  view specified in the View Name entry box. This
  list cannot be changed.


>>Add/Change Imports
------------------
  Enter the name(s) of the view(s) to be added to the
  imports for the view specified in the View Name
  entry box. The Imports/Model command imports only
  the views named in Add/Change Imports list. It does
  not import views in the closures of those views.
  
  The views named in the Add/Change Imports list must
  be spec or combined views. If multiple views are
  specified in the View Name entry box, the
  Imports/Model command imports each of the views in
  the Add/Change Imports list into each of the views
  in the View Name entry box.

  Existing imports are not affected unless a
  Add/Change Imports view is from the same subsystem
  as an existing import. In this case, the Add/Change
  Import view replaces the corresponding existing
  import.

  To add or change one or more imported views that
  are listed in the Current Imports list:

  * Click on the name(s) of the view(s) in the
    Current Imports list. The view names appear in
    reverse video. Note that you can select more than
    one view from the list without unselecting other
    views. (To unselect a view, click on it again.)
    
  * Click on the right arrow button to the left of
    the Add/Change Imports list. The selected view
    names are copied into the Remove Imports list.
    
  Alternatively, you can:
  
  * Place the insertion point in the Add/Change
    Imports list by clicking in the list.
    
  * Enter or edit the name of a view using basic text
    editing operations. Note that the view names must
    be fully qualified; that is, they must begin at
    the root world, !. You also can name an activity
    as an indirect file, which is equivalent to
    naming the spec view associated with each
    subsystem in the activity.
  
  To remove a view name from the Add/Change Imports
  list, use basic text editing operations.


>>Remove Imports
--------------                                            
  Enter the name of the view(s) to be removed from
  the imports of the view specified in the View Name
  entry box. The Imports/Model command destroys links
  to the views specified in this list.
  
  If multiple views are specified in the View Name
  entry box, the Imports/Model command removes
  imports of any the views in the Remove Imports list
  from each of the views in the View Name entry box.

  Note that imports cannot be removed from code views. 

  To remove one or more imported views that are
  listed in the Current Imports list:

  * Click on the name(s) of the view(s) in the
    Current Imports list. The view names appear in
    reverse video. Note that you can select more than
    one view from the list without unselecting other
    views. (To unselect a view, click on it again.)
    
  * Click on the right arrow button to the left of
    the Remove Imports list. The selected view names
    are copied into the Remove Imports list.
    
  Alternatively, you can:
  
  * Place the insertion point in the Remove Imports
    list by clicking in the list.
    
  * Enter or edit the name of a view using basic text
    editing operations. Note that the view names must
    be fully qualified; that is, they must begin at
    the root world, !.

  To remove a name from the Remove Imports list, edit
  the list directly using text editing operations.

  The Imports/Model command does not remove an import
  if there are units compiled against any of the
  links it created. However, such an import can be
  removed if the units are demoted to the source
  state.
  

>>Model
-----
  Enter the name of the world to be used as the new
  model for the view specified in the View Name entry
  box. The context for the resolution of this name is
  the world !Model, although a model in another world
  can be specified by using a fully qualified
  pathname.
  
  You can change a view's model to:

  * Invoke a new switches file for the view.

  * Rebuild the view's links.

  * Reset the number of levels for automatic name
    generation for release and spec views. (This
    affects only future release views.)

  * Change the view's target key. However, the change
    must be to a target key that is compatible with
    the current target key. For example, a view with
    target key R1000 cannot change to a model with
    target key Mc68020_Bare.
    
  Changing the view's model does not affect the
  behavior of the Add/Change Imports or Remove
  Imports list.


>>Refresh Imports
---------------
  Check this box to cause the existing imports of the
  view specified in the View Name entry box to be
  refreshed to include any new unit specifications
  that have been added.
  
  Checking this box does not affect the behavior of
  the Add/Change Imports list or Remove Imports list.
  Views listed in those fields are added, changed, or
  removed, independent of the value of the Refresh
  Imports list.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Import
  function Cmvc.Imported_Views
  procedure Cmvc.Remove_Import
  procedure Cmvc.Replace_Model


#Control/Uncontrol
  CMVC:Control/Uncontrol determines whether the
  specified object(s) are controlled by the CMVC
  system and therefore subject to reservation. Any
  object in a subsystem can be controlled.
  
  Controlling an object associates a reservation
  token with it. The CMVC:Check In and CMVC:Check Out
  commands operate by manipulating reservation
  tokens, and joined objects share not only the same
  name but also a single reservation token.
  
  For more information about controlling and
  uncontrolling objects, see the Project Management
  (PM) book of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>View
----
  Enter the name of the view that contains the
  object(s) that are to be controlled or
  uncontrolled. Multiple views can be specified using
  wildcards, context characters, special names, set
  notation, or an indirect file. If multiple views
  are specified, they must all be in the same
  subsystem.
  

>>Units to Control or Uncontrol 
-----------------------------
  Choose the object(s) in the view(s) specified in
  the View entry box that are to be made controlled
  or uncontrolled:
  
  * To affect all the objects in the Units directory
    of the specified view(s), check the All radio
    button.
    
  * To affect all the Ada compilation units in the
    Units directory of the specified view(s), check
    the All Ada Units radio button.

  * To affect a single object or a specific set of
    objects, enter the name(s) of those object(s) in
    the entry box and check the radio button next to
    the box. This name is resolved with respect to
    the view specified in the View entry box and must
    include the name of the Units directory name, if
    that is where the object(s) are. Multiple views
    can be specified using wildcards, context
    characters, special names, set notation, or an
    indirect file.

  Before a subunit can be controlled, its parent must
  be controlled.

  Objects in the State subdirectory of a view cannot
  be controlled; attempting to do so produces an
  error message. Similarly, derived objects resulting
  from cross-target development cannot be controlled
  (the names of such objects are enclosed in angle
  brackets in directory displays).

  The name of the new reservation token is
  automatically generated by the Environment.
  Automatically generated names of reservation tokens
  are derived from the view portion of the enclosing
  view name (up to the first underscore character).
  For example, the severed objects in a view called
  Rev1_Working would have "Rev1" as the
  automatically-generated name of the reservation
  token. However, if "Rev1" is currently in use, then
  "Rev1_1" is used.
  
  If a named object is already controlled, a note
  appears in the output log.


>>Control
-------
  Check this radio button to make the specified
  object(s) controlled by the CMVC system and
  therefore subject to reservation.

  Once controlled, an object must be checked out
  (using CMVC:Check Out) before it can be modified
  and it must be checked in (using CMVC:Check In)
  before various commands can access it.

  When an object is made controlled with this
  command, the textual changes from one generation to
  the next are stored in the CMVC database. This
  permits the reconstruction of previous generations
  through, for example, the CMVC:Revert to Generation
  command or by rebuilding a view from a
  configuration object. (Note that because changed
  lines are determined textually, changing an Ada
  unit's pretty-printing causes all lines to be
  stored as changed lines.)

  The newly controlled objects are not joined to any
  objects in any other views.


>>Uncontrol
---------
  Check this radio button to make the specified
  object(s) uncontrolled, so that change information
  about them is no longer collected in the CMVC
  database. You may need to uncontrol objects to:
  
  * Prepare a controlled object for deletion
  
  * Change an Ada unit's kind (for example, from
    procedure to function). Before changing an Ada
    unit's kind, you must expunge the CMVC database
    using the Cmvc_Maintenance.Expunge_Database
    command.
  
  Existing history for the objects remains in the
  CMVC database until the database is expunged using
  the Expunge_Database command. Objects can be made
  controlled again using this command and setting the
  Control radio button; if the CMVC database has not
  been expunged, the history for the recontrolled
  objects continues where it stopped.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Make_Controlled
  procedure Cmvc.Make_Uncontrolled


#Revert to Generation
  Each time you check out an object, a new generation
  of that object is created in the CMVC database.
  Editing changes are collected in the new generation
  and saved in the CMVC database when you check in
  the object. Thus, generations capture the changes
  made from checkout to checkout. Each generation of
  an object is numbered, starting with generation 1.
  Generation 1 is created when you make an object
  controlled; initially generation 1 contains the
  text of the object at the time it was made
  controlled. Over time the CMVC database builds up a
  series of numbered generations for each controlled
  object.

  CMVC:Revert to Generation returns the specified
  controlled CMVC object or objects to the specified
  generation. More specifically, this command
  replaces the contents of each specified object with
  the contents of the indicated generation of that
  object.

  The generation to which an object is reverted can
  be retained as the latest generation if the Create
  New Latest Generation entry box is true. Otherwise,
  the reverted object is updated to the latest
  generation the next time the object is checked out.
  
  This command will demote Ada units, if necessary in
  order to revert the specified objects to the
  specified generation. It does not repromote units
  that were demoted in the process of reverting the
  specified objects.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Object Name
-----------
  Enter the name of the object or objects to be
  reverted. Only controlled and sourced objects can
  be reverted. (An error is reported if you try to
  revert an object that was made controlled without
  saving source.) An object that is currently checked
  out cannot be reverted, and this is reported in the
  output log. By default, the selected object is
  reverted.

  Multiple objects can be specified by using
  wildcards, context characters, special names, set
  notation, or an indirect file.


>>Revert Object to Prior Generation Number
----------------------------------------
  Enter the number of the generation to which the
  specified object is to be reverted. A positive
  integer expresses a particular generation number
  (each generation is numbered, starting from 0). A
  negative integer expresses a previous generation,
  counting back from the object's current generation;
  for example, the value of -1 indicates the object's
  previous generation.

  If multiple objects are specified in the Object
  Name box and the Revert Object to Prior Generation
  Number box has a positive value, the Revert to
  Generation command attempts to change all objects
  to the same generation. If multiple objects are
  specified and Revert Object to Prior Generation
  Number has a negative value, the generation of each
  object is calculated individually.


>>Create New Latest Generation
----------------------------
  Check this box to make a copy of the reverted
  generation at the end of the current history,
  effectively making a new latest generation that is
  a copy of the generation specified in the Revert
  Object to Prior Generation Number entry box.
  Development proceeds from this new latest
  generation.

  If this box is not checked, the latest generation
  remains the same as it was before this command was
  executed. Consequently, a reverted object can be
  inspected or compiled against other units; however,
  the next time the object is checked out, it is
  updated to the latest generation.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Revert


#CMVC Report Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>List Controlled
---------------
  Displays a list of the objects in the current view
  that are under CMVC control. For each object, the
  display includes the object's name, its current and
  latest generation numbers, the view in which it is
  checked out or from which it was most recently
  checked in, whether or not it is currently checked
  out, the user who checked it out most recently, and
  the expected check-in date.


>>List Uncontrolled
-----------------
  Displays a list of the objects in the current view
  that are not under CMVC control.
  

>>List Out-of-Date Objects
------------------------
  Displays a list of the objects in the current view
  that are not at the most recent generation. For
  each object, the display includes the object's
  name, its current and latest generation numbers,
  the view in which it is checked out or from which
  it was most recently checked in, whether or not it
  is currently checked out, the user who checked it
  out most recently, and the expected check-in date.


>>List Checked-Out Objects
------------------------
  Displays a list of the objects in the current view
  that are checked out. For each object, the display
  includes the object's name, its current and latest
  generation numbers, the view in which it is checked
  out, the user who checked it out, and the expected
  check-in date.


>>List View Imports
-----------------
  Displays a list of all the views imported by the
  current view.


>>List View Referencers
---------------------
  Displays a list of all subsystems that import the
  current view.


>>List View Exports
-----------------
  Displays a list of all the units exported by the
  current view.


>>List View Model
---------------
  Displays the name of the model used by the current
  view.


>>Object History Information...
-----------------------------
  Displays the history for a view or object within a
  view. This command can be used to display the
  differences between two released views, between a
  working view and a previously released view, and
  the like. It also can be used to display how a
  particular object has changed from one view or
  configuration to another.



#Object History Information
  CMVC:CMVC Report:Object History Information
  displays the history for the specified view or
  object within a view.

  This command shows what has changed between two
  configurations (or two views) on the same path. For
  example, the Object History Information command can
  be used to display the differences between two
  released views, between a working view and a
  previously released view, and the like. It also can
  be used to display how a particular object has
  changed from one view or configuration to another.

  The Object History Information command provides the
  following information for each specified object (if
  a view is specified, this information is shown for
  each controlled object in the view):

  * The join set name (the name of the reservation
    token for the joined objects)

  * The object's history for the generations that
    were created between the configurations specified
    in the Starting Generation and Ending Generation
    entry boxes

  For each of the requested generations of an object,
  the history includes:

  * The time and date of the checkout and checkin
    that created the generation

  * The notes for the object

  * The changes that occurred since the previous
    generation (if requested by the Show Changed
    Regions check box)


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Object Name
-----------
  Enter the name of the object or objects whose
  history is to be displayed. You can specify one or
  more views or one or more controlled objects within
  a view. Multiple objects can be specified by using
  wildcards, context characters, special names, set
  notation, or an indirect file.


>>Starting Generation
------------------
  Enter the name of the view or configuration that
  serves as the starting point for the displayed
  history. The view or configuration you specify must
  contain some generation of each of the objects
  designated in the Object Name entry box. This
  command displays the history for each object,
  starting with changes to the generation contained
  in the specified view or configuration.

  The null string ("") specifies that history is to
  be displayed starting with generation 1.


>>Ending Generation
-----------------
  Enter the name of the view or configuration that
  serves as the ending point for the displayed
  history. The view or configuration you specify must
  contain some generation of each of the objects
  designated by the Object Name entry box. The
  history displayed for each object ends with the
  generation contained in the specified view or
  configuration.

  The null string ("") specifies that history is
  displayed up to the latest generation.


>>Show Changed Regions
--------------------
  Choose this box to display the differences between
  a given generation and the one before it.

  If this box is checked, the text of the changes is
  displayed. The command displays only the
  differences between the generations, omitting lines
  that are the same as the previous generation. If
  this box is not checked, no changes are displayed.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Project Management (PM) book of the Environment 
Reference Manual
  procedure Cmvc.Show_History
  

#Debug Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------
        

>>Start Debugging of Command
--------------------------
  Creates a new job to run the current command under
  the debugger.
  

>>Debugger Commands Palette...
----------------------------
  Displays the Debugger Palette, a control palette
  that allows you to debug Ada programs.
  

>>Debugger Window
---------------
  Designates the current debugger. 
  
  If there is more than one active debugger, this
  command designates which one is the current
  debugger. All debugging commands are directed to
  the current debugger. This command applies to
  various targets with active debuggers in the
  current session along with the R1000 native
  debugger.
  
  For more information regarding each debugger, see
  the "Cross-Debugging" chapter of the
  Cross-Development Facility User's Manual for the
  specific target.
  

>>Finish Debugging Job and Detach
-------------------------------
  Terminates debugging of the current job. The job
  continues normal execution.
  

>>Finishing Debugging Job and Kill
--------------------------------
  Terminates debugging of the current job and aborts
  the job.
  

#Debugger Palette
  The Debugger Palette allows you to debug Ada
  programs using a persistent control palette.

  The top left section of the Debugger Palette
  contains controls for the execution of the program
  running under the debugger. The bottom-left section
  of the palette controls variables. The right side
  of the palette contains the debugging option menu
  that controls sets of buttons for:

  * Breakpoint manipulation
  * Exception handling
  * Task information
  * Task control
  * Debugger control
  * Tracing control
  * Target machine operations
  * Machine and memory information
  * Quitting
              
  To display a set of buttons from the option menu,
  click the option menu label to reveal the options.
  Then click the option you want to reveal the new
  set of buttons.
  

>>Opening The Debugger Palette
----------------------------
  Choose Debug:Debugger Commands Palette or click the
  Debug button on the window control panel.

  
>>Closing The Debugger Palette
----------------------------
  Click the Window Remove button in the top, right
  corner of the Debugger Palette (it looks like four
  arrows pointing into each other).
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual


#Debugger Put Variable
  The Put button (with ellipsis) on the Debugger
  Palette displays the value of the object specified
  by the variable.
  
  By default, the Put command displays the value of
  the selected object in the current frame of the
  last stopped task.

  The Put command accesses variables according to the
  type of Ada unit in which they were declared.
  Variables declared in a procedure or function are
  elaborated each time that procedure or function is
  called, and Put accesses the individual instance of
  such a variable by its stack frame. Variables
  declared in library-unit packages are elaborated
  once, and Put accesses such variables without
  reference to stack frames.

  Note: Unless the Variable entry box and Stack Frame
  slider specify a specific elaboration of a
  variable, the Put command uses the current control
  context and stack searching to determine which
  instance of that variable to designate for display
  modification. See the descriptions of these options
  for more details.
 

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Variable
--------
  Enter the name of the object to be displayed. The
  value of Variable can be an absolute pathname, a
  relative pathname, or a special name that resolves
  to a designated object. The values of Variable and
  Stack Frame (see below) together designate the
  actual object whose value the Put command displays.
  These values define which has precedence in
  determining the location:

   * If Variable is an absolute pathname, it has
     precedence when Put searches for the object.

   * If Variable is a relative pathname, Put uses
     both Variable and Stack Frame to designate an
     object.

   * If Variable is a special name, Put searches for
     the first occurrence of the specified object in
     the designated frame and subsequent frames.
  

>>Stack Frame
-----------
  Set the slider to the number of the stack frame
  containing the object to be displayed.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Put
    
    
#Debugger Modify Variable
  The Modify button on the Debugger Palette modifies
  the value of the specified variable.
  
  By default, the Modify command modifies the value
  of the selected variable in the current frame of
  the last stopped task.
  
  The specified variable must be a scalar. Structures
  such as records or arrays can be modified only by
  changing the values of individual components.
  
  The Modify command accesses variables according to
  the type of Ada unit in which they were declared.
  Variables declared in a procedure or function are
  elaborated each time that procedure or function is
  called, Modify accesses the individual instance of
  such a variable by its stack frame. Variables
  declared in library-unit packages are elaborated
  once, and Modify accesses such variables without
  reference to stack frames.
       

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the variable to be modified. You
  may enter an absolute pathname, a relative
  pathname, or a special name that resolves to a
  designated variable. The value of the Name entry
  box designates the actual variable whose value
  Modify changes. This value determines the location,
  as shown in the following:

  * If the name is an absolute pathname or a relative
    pathname, the name has precedence when this
    command searches for the variable.
   
  * If the name is a special name, this command
    searches for the first occurrence of the
    specified variable name from the first frame in
    the stack.
  

>>New Value
---------
  Enter the new value of the variable. Numeric values
  are specified with simple numeric representations.
  Expressions are not allowed. 
  
  Enumeration values are specified with unqualified
  names of enumeration constants. Because the
  variable name determines its type, enumerated
  values for New_Value do not need to be qualified.
  For example, the string "Nul" is sufficient to
  specify the character literal Ascii.Nul.
  

>>Stack Frame
-----------
  Move the slider to specify the number of the stack
  frame containing the variable to be modified.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Modify
    
    
#Debugger Set Breakpoint
  The Break button on the Breakpoints button set of
  the Debugger Palette option menu creates a
  breakpoint at a specific location in the specified
  task.

  A breakpoint interrupts execution of a task at a
  specified location (for example, a statement or
  declaration) in the program source. The task stops
  before the execution of the specified statement or
  declaration and the debugger displays the
  breakpoint number and location. The task does not
  resume execution until directed; the Run and
  Execute commands resume execution of stopped tasks.
  
  A breakpoint must be active to interrupt execution.
  Breakpoints are active when created; they can be
  deactivated and reactivated at any time.
  Breakpoints remain until they are deleted, although
  they can be enabled or disabled.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Location
--------
  Enter the location at which the breakpoint is to be
  set. The location may be an Ada program unit (a
  package, task, or subprogram), a frame reference, a
  statement, or a declaration. By default, the value
  of Location is the selected statement or
  declaration.
   
  The value of Location can be an absolute pathname,
  a relative pathname, or a special name that
  resolves to a designated location. The value of the
  Location entry box designates the actual location
  at which the Break command creates a breakpoint. 
  

>>Lifetime
--------
  These radio buttons specify the lifetime of the
  breakpoint. 

  * Permanent: Makes the breakpoint permanently
    enabled.

  * Temporary: Makes the breakpoint temporarily
    enabled.
  
  
>>In Task(s)
----------
  These radio buttons specify the task in which the
  breakpoint is set.
  
  * All: Makes the breakpoint apply to all tasks.

  * Root Task: The breakpoint applies to the root
    task.

  * "Current Task": The breakpoint applies to the
    default task based on the control context (see
    Access help for Debugger Control Context):

    - If the control context is set, the breakpoint
      is set for the task in the control context.

    - If the control context is not set, the
      breakpoint applies to all tasks, including the
      new tasks initiated after the breakpoint is
      set.
 
  * Task: Enter the pathname of the task in which you
    want to set the breakpoint.
  
  
>>Trip Count
----------
  Enter the number of times the statement in which
  the breakpoint is set must be encountered in the
  execution of the program before the debugger
  interrupts execution of the task. If Count = N,
  execution will be halted just before the Nth time
  the statement is executed. The default specifies
  that the breakpoint interrupts execution the first
  time the statement is encountered.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Break


#Debugger Exception Handling 
  The Catch, Propagate, and Forget buttons on the
  Exception Handling button set of the Debugger
  Palette option menu have the following
  functionality:

  * Catch: Requests that the debugger halt task
    execution when a particular exception is raised.
    
    Propagate requests and Catch requests combine to
    determine the action that the debugger takes when
    an exception is raised. The debugger maintains a
    list of catch and propagate requests entered by
    calls to the Catch and Propagate commands. When
    an exception in the user program is raised, the
    debugger looks at this list to determine whether
    to stop the program and inform the user. If the
    most specific request is a Catch request, the
    debugger halts execution; otherwise, it does not.
   
  * Propagate: Requests that the debugger continue
    task execution when a particular exception is
    raised.
    
  * Forget: Removes Catch and Propagate requests. By
    default, this command removes Catch and Propagate
    requests for the selected exception in all tasks
    and locations.

    A Forget command removes Catch and Propagate
    requests matching the options of the command. The
    debugger does not apply Forget requests in order
    of specificity as it does Catch and Propagate
    requests. 
    
    Note: A Forget command that applies to all
    exceptions in all tasks and locations does not
    clear every Catch and Propagate request active in
    the job currently being debugged. To clear Catch
    and Propagate requests, choose Exception
    Handling:Forget All on the option menu of the
    Debugger Palette.
 

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the exception to be caught or
  propagated, or the Catch or Propagate request to be
  cleared.
  

>>Task
----
  Enter the name of the task to which the request is
  limited. The reserved name "All" selects all tasks.
  The default value is null.
  
  If the value is null, the command designates no
  specific task and chooses a default based on the
  control context (see Access Help for Debugger
  Control Context for information on setting the
  control context):
  
  * If the control context is set, the request
    applies to the task in the control context.

  * If the control context is not set, the request
    applies to all tasks.
                 
  Values for this option can be task synonyms.
  

>>Location
--------
  Specifies the location in which the exception will
  be caught. This entry box restricts the request to
  exceptions raised within the specified location. If
  the pathname is not fully qualified, it is
  interpreted relative to the current evaluation
  context. The default value is null, which
  identifies all locations.

  If Location specifies an Ada unit, the request
  applies only to exceptions raised inside that unit.
  The request does not apply to Ada units nested
  inside the selected unit (for example, procedures
  nested within a package body, nested blocks, and
  accept statements).
  

>>Catch                           
-----
  Requests that the debugger halt task execution when
  a particular exception is raised.
                                 

>>Propagate
---------
  Requests that the debugger continue task execution
  when a particular exception is raised.
  

>>Forget
------
  Removes Catch and Propagate requests.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Catch
  procedure Debug.Forget
  procedure Debug.Propagate


#Debugger Control Context
  The Set Control Context button on the Debugger
  Control button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu sets the control context to the specified
  pathname.

  By default, this command sets the control context
  to the selected item.

  The debugger maintains two contexts: the control
  context and the evaluation context. The debugger
  evaluates unqualified pathnames, task names, and
  exception names in one of the two contexts. Context
  evaluation does not apply to fully qualified
  pathnames, task names, or exception names.
  
  To display the current contexts, choose Debugger
  Control: Show Contexts on the Debugger Palette
  option menu.
  
  If the Set Debugger Control Context To option
  specifies a selection, the command searches the
  selection for a context in the stack for that
  selection. The command substitutes the value of the
  Stack_Start flag. The default value of Stack_Start
  is the first frame in the stack.
  
  From the first search frame, the command searches a
  specific number of frames, specified with the
  Stack_Count flag. The default number of search
  frames is 10.
 

>>Control-Context Usage
---------------------
  The following table lists the manner in which various
  commands use the control context:

   -----------------------------------------------
  |Command |Control Context Used As:              |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Break   |Default task to which the break is    |
  |        |restricted. The control context also  |
  |        |specifies which task's stack is used  |
  |        |if the pathname in the command refers |
  |        |to a stack.                           |
   -----------------------------------------------   
  |Catch   |Task for which exception controls are |
  |        |set.                                  |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Clear_  |Default task for which stepping       |
  |Stepping|operations are canceled.              |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Display |Task whose stack is used if the       |
  |        |pathname in the Display command refers|
  |        |to a stack.                           |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Execute |Default task that is started.         |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Forget  |Exception and task for which exception|
  |        |operations are cleared.               |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |History_|Default task for which history        |
  |Display |information is displayed.             |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Hold    |Default task that is held.            |
   -----------------------------------------------
  |Propa-  |Task for which exception controls are |
  |gate    |set.                                  |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Put     |Task whose stack is used if the       |
  |        |pathname in the Put command refers to |
  |        |a stack.                              |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Release |Default task that is released.        |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Run     |Default task for stepping.            |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Stack   |Default task whose stack is displayed.|
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Stop    |Default task that is stopped.         |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Take_   |Default task for which history        |
  |History |information is gathered.              |
   ----------------------------------------------- 
  |Trace   |Default task for which a tracing      |
  |        |operation is enabled or disabled.     |
   ----------------------------------------------- 

  The value of the control context can be the null
  string (""):

  * For commands requiring a task designation, a null
    value defaults to all tasks.

  * For commands requiring a stack designation, a
    null value defaults to the stack of the last task
    stopped by the debugger. Specifically, the name
    of the last stopped task is used for interpreting
    pathnames in any command.
 
  * For certain commands (for example, Run and
    Stack), it is also the default value for
    parameters designating tasks.
 
  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Set Debugger Control Context To
-------------------------------
  Enter the value for the context. The default value
  is the context in the selected item.

  The null string ("") and the reserved name "All,"
  both of which identify all tasks, are legal values
  for this entry box.

  The control context must be an Ada pathname to a
  task, a task number, or a task synonym. The
  Debug.Set_Task_Name and Debug_Tools.Set_Task_Name
  Environment commands create task synonyms.

  If the value of Set Debugger Control Context To is
  not a task number, task synonym, or fully qualified
  pathname, the Context command interprets it in the
  current control context as any other pathname. This
  command interprets the pathname before defining the
  new value for the context; it uses the current
  context to determine the new context.

  The context must be valid both at the time it is
  specified and at the time it is used.
 
  The value of the Set Debugger Control Context To
  option can be an absolute pathname, a relative
  pathname, or a special name that resolves to an
  appropriate item. The value of this entry box
  designates the new context.

  See the "Debugger Naming" section of the Key
  Concepts and the Path_Name subtype for more
  information on designating contexts with pathnames.
               

>>RESTRICTIONS
------------

  The context pathname must be legal both when
  defined and when used by another command.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging book (DEB) of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Context
  procedure Debug.Show

Rational Access Help
  Set Evaluation Context
    
    
#Debugger Evaluation Context
  The Set Evaluation Context button on the Debugger
  Control option menu of the Debugger Palette option
  menu sets the evaluation context to the specified
  pathname.

  The debugger maintains two contexts: the control
  context and the evaluation context. The debugger
  evaluates unqualified pathnames, task names, and
  exception names in one of the two contexts. Context
  evaluation does not apply to fully qualified
  pathnames, task names, or exception names.

  To display the current contexts choose Debugger
  Control:Show Contexts on the Debugger Palette
  option menu.
  
  If the Set Debugger Evaluation Context To entry box
  specifies a selection, the command searches the
  selection for a context in the stack for that
  selection. The command substitutes the value of the
  Stack_Start flag. The default value of Stack_Start
  is the first frame in the stack.
  
  From the first search frame, the command searches a
  specific number of frames, specified with the
  Stack_Count flag. The default number of search
  frames is 10.
 

>>Evaluation-Context Usage
------------------------
  The following table lists the manner in which various
  commands use the evaluation context:
                                                      
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Command|Evaluation Context Used As:           |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Break  |A context in which to interpret       |
   |       |unqualified object names.             |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Catch  |A context for unqualified location and|
   |       |exception names.                      |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Context|A context for unqualified names for   |
   |       |the control or evaluation context.    |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Display|A context in which to interpret       |
   |       |unqualified object names.             |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Forget |A context for unqualified location and|
   |       |exception names.                      |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Modify |A context in which to interpret       |
   |       |unqualified object names.             |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Propa- |A context for unqualified location and|
   |gate   |exception names.                      |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Put    |A context in which to interpret       |
   |       |unqualified object names.             |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Take_  |A context for unqualified location    |
   |History|names.                                |
    ----------------------------------------------
   |Trace  |A context for unqualified location    |
   |       |names.                                |
    ----------------------------------------------

  If the pathname is not qualified--that is, if it
  does not begin with a period (.), underscore ( _ ),
  exclamation mark (!), dollar sign ($), double
  dollar sign ($$), caret (^), or percent symbol
  (%)--the debugger prefixes it with the evaluation
  context, using appropriate connecting
  punctuation.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Set Debugger Evaluation Context To
----------------------------------
  Enter the value for the context. The default value
  is the context in the selected item.

  The null string ("") and the reserved name "All,"
  both of which identify all tasks, are legal values
  for this entry box.

  The evaluation context must be an Ada pathname to a
  task, a task number, or a task synonym. The
  Debug.Set_Task_Name and Debug_Tools.Set_Task_Name
  Environment commands create task synonyms.

  If the value of Set Debugger Evaluation Context To
  is not a task number, task synonym, or fully
  qualified pathname, the command interprets it in
  the current evaluation context as any other
  pathname. This command interprets the pathname
  before defining the new value for the context; it
  uses the current context to determine the new
  context.

  The context must be valid both at the time it is
  specified and at the time it is used. For example,
  an evaluation context of _4.X must be valid when
  specified (frame 4 must exist and have an object X
  in it) and when it is used (the Put ("Y") command
  is valid only when _4.X.Y exists).
 
  The value of the Set Debugger Evaluation Context To
  entry box can be an absolute pathname, a relative
  pathname, or a special name that resolves to an
  appropriate item. The value of this entry box
  designates the new context.

  See the "Debugger Naming" section of the Key
  Concepts and the Path_Name subtype for more
  information on designating contexts with pathnames.
  


>>RESTRICTIONS
------------

  The context pathname must be legal both when
  defined and when used by another command.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Context
  procedure Debug.Show

Rational Access Help
  Debugger Control Context
    
    
#Debugger Variables
  The Set button on the Debugger Control button set
  of the Debugger Palette option menu sets a numeric
  value flag to the specified value.

  See the Numeric type for more information on the
  numeric value flags.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------
  
>>Set (option menu)
-----------------
  Choose the numeric variable to change. Your options
  are:

  * Display Count: Specifies the default value of the
    Count parameter in the Display_Environment
    command. The standard value is 10.

  * Display Level: Specifies the number of levels to
    expand complex data structures in the Put
    command.

  * Element Count: Specifies the maximum number of
    elements in any array displayed with the Put
    button on the Debugger Palette.

  * First Element: Specifies the first element of an
    array displayed with the Put command.

  * History Count: Specifies the default value for
    the Count parameter for the History_Display
    Environment command. The standard value is 10.

  * History Entries: Specifies the maximum number of
    history entries kept by the debugger. The
    standard value is 1,000. This flag is not
    currently supported.

  * History Start: Specifies the oldest history entry
    displayed by the History_Display Environment
    command.

  * Memory Count: Specifies the default value in the
    Count entry box in the dialog box displayed by
    the Display Memory button. This button is located
    on the Machine and Memory option on the Debugger
    Palette option menu.
                    
  * Pointer Level: Specifies the level of pointer
    values to be expanded in the display produced by
    the Put button on the Debugger Palette.

  * Stack Count: Specifies the default value of the
    Count option used in various commands (for
    example, Modify and Stack on the Debug Palette).

  * Stack Start: Specifies the default starting frame
    number in various commands (for example, Modify
    and Stack on the Debugger Palette).

    
>>To
--
  Enter the new value for the selected variable.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Disable
  procedure Debug.Enable
  type Debug.Numeric
  type Debug.Option
  procedure Debug.Set_Value
    
    
#Debugger Control Options
  The Enable and Disable buttons on the Debugger
  Control button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu enables or disables the selected option,
  respectively.

  
>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Enable
--------------
  Choose the Enable radio button to cause the command
  to enable the specified option. The Enable and
  Disable buttons cannot be chosen simultaneously.
  

>>Disable
-------
  Choose the Diable radio button to cause the command
  to diable the specified option. The Enable and
  Disable buttons cannot be chosen simultaneously.

  
  
>>Addresses
---------
  Includes machine information in displays produced by
  the Stack command (on the Debugger Palette); All
  Tasks and Stopped Tasks (on the Show popup menu of
  the Debugger Palette); Exceptions--All Tasks,
  Rendezvous Info--All Tasks, and Space
  Information--All Tasks (on the Task Information
  button set of the Debugger Palette option menu);
  Activate All Tracing and Deactivate All Tracing (on
  the Tracing button set of the Debugger Palette
  option menu); and the standard display message for
  stopped tasks.
    

>>Break at Creation
-----------------
  Causes the equivalent of a breakpoint to be placed
  at the point where new tasks begin elaboration.


>>Declaration Display
-------------------
  Forces listing of all declarations in source-code
  listings by the Debug.Display Environment command.

    
>>Delete Temporary Breaks
-----------------------
  Forces deletion of temporary breakpoints after the
  debugger encounters them.

    
>>Display Creation
----------------
  Forces a trace display for each task as it is
  created.


>>Echo Commands
-------------
  Forces all debugger commands to be echoed in the
  debugger window.

  
>>Freeze Tasks
------------
  Requests that the debugger attempt to stop all tasks
  when any task is stopped by the debugger.


>>Include Packages
----------------
  Causes inclusion of elaborated packages in displays
  generated by the following commands on the Task
  Information button set of the Debugger Palette
  option menu: List All Tasks, List Blocked Tasks,
  List Held Tasks, List Tasks Not Running, List
  Running Tasks, and List Stopped Tasks; and for All
  Tasks, Held Tasks and Stopped Tasks on the Show
  popup menu on the Debugger Palette.


>>Interpret Control Words
-----------------------
  Forces termination of control stack words displayed
  by the Display Memory command (on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu).
  

>>Kill Old Jobs
-------------
  Forces termination of the last job being debugged
  when a new program is started.


>>Machine Level
-------------
  Allows certain machine-level operations.


>>No History Timestamps
---------------------
  Prevents inclusion of timestamps in history entries
  displayed by the History_Display Environment
  command.


>>Optimize Generic History
------------------------
  Precludes history tracing for generic instances. A
  history is taken only for the generic itself, which
  increases execution speed for that generic.
    
>>Permanent Breakpoints
---------------------
  Specifies whether breakpoints are permanent or
  temporary.
    

>>Put Locals
----------
  Causes display of local variables as well as formals
  when the Put command (on the Debugger Palette) is
  called with locations that are packages or
  subprograms.


>>Qualify Stack Names
-------------------
  Causes the names displayed by the Stack command to
  be fully qualified. When disabled, the names are the
  simple names of the subprograms executing in
  command.


>>Require Debug Off
-----------------
  Prevents the initiation of a new debugger job from
  forcing the termination of the current job. If this
  option flag is enabled, the current job can
  terminate only by normal completion of the job or by
  explicitly executing the Debug:Finish Debugging and
  Detatch or Debug:Finish Debugging Job and Kill menu
  command. If this option is disabled, the current job
  will be terminated by the debugger when a new job is
  initiated.
    

>>Save Exceptions
---------------
  Causes retention of exception-handling information
  from the Catch and Propagate commands until the next
  debugging run.
    

>>Show Locations
--------------
  Causes highlighted display of current source
  location for any task that stops in the debugger.
  The debugger displays source code for only the
  control context task, the root task, or (in the case
  of the Step commands on the Debugger Palette) all
  tasks.
    

>>Timestamps
----------
  Forces display of a timestamp for each command and
  stopped task. 
  
#Debugger Tracing Control 
  The Tracing Control button on the Tracing button set
  of the Debugger Palette option menu enables or
  disables tracing for a specified task. By default,
  this command initiates tracing of all events
  occurring in all tasks in the selected location.
  
  The Tracing Control command creates a trace request
  with the restrictions defined in the options of the
  command. For each event that matches the options of
  a trace request, the debugger displays a message in
  the debugger window. These events include
  statements, declarations, calls, rendezvous, and
  exceptions. Trace output can also be directed to a
  file using the Trace_To_File Environment command.
  

>>Order of Trace Messages
-----------------------  
  The order in which events occur and the debugger
  displays messages regarding them differs depending
  on the type of event. The following list details the
  specific order for each event:

  * Statement trace messages are displayed before the
    statement is executed.
  
  * Call trace messages are displayed before the
    first declaration or statement of the subprogram
    is executed.

  * Rendezvous trace messages are displayed before
    the first statement of the rendezvous is
    executed.

  * Exception trace messages are displayed
    immediately after the exception is raised but
    before any stack frames are popped and before the
    handler code is executed.

  The debugger allows multiple simultaneous trace
  requests. This permits tracing of more than one
  subprogram.

  The Tracing Control command does not maintain a
  buffer of history entries as the Take_History
  Environment command does. In a history, selected
  sets of messages can be displayed, such as messages
  only from a specific task or for some range of
  messages. See the Take_History and History_Display
  Environment commands for more information on
  histories.

  Note: Tracing reduces execution speed. 
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Trace
-----
  * Enable: Enables the trace. By default, the trace
    is enabled.
  
  * Disable: Disables the trace.
  
  
>>All Events (option menu)
------------------------
  Choose the class of execution events to be traced.
  Your options are:

  * All Events (default)
  * Call
  * Exception Raised
  * Machine Instruction
  * Propagate Exception
  * Rendezvous
  * Statement


>>In Task
-------
  Enter the task to be traced. The default value is
  the null string ("").
  
  Trace requests apply only to a specific task or to
  all tasks. If the value is nonnull, In_Task
  designates the specified task. If the value is
  null, In_Task designates no specific task and Trace
  chooses a default task based on the control
  context:

  * If the control context is set, the trace request
    is limited to the task in the control context.

  * If the control context is not set, the trace
    request applies to all tasks.
   

>>Location
--------
  Enter the location to which tracing is restricted.
  The Location entry box must specify a subprogram,
  statement, or all locations. By default, the value
  of this entry box is the selected statement or
  declaration.
                                        
  The value of Location can be an absolute pathname,
  a relative pathname, or a special name that
  resolves to a designated location. This value
  designates the actual location to which tracing is
  limited.

  If the value of the Location entry box is the null
  string (""), the entry box designates all
  locations. Also, if the value is a special name
  that cannot be resolved, the entry box designates
  all locations.

  See the "Debugger Naming" section of the Key
  Concepts and the Path_Name subtype in the Debugging
  (DEB) book of the Environment Reference Manual for
  more information on designating locations.
  

>>Stack Frame
-----------
  Move the slider to display the number of the frame
  for which tracing is initiated.
  

>>To File
-------
  Enter the name of the file to which commands send
  tracing output. The default null string ("")
  resolves to the debugger window.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.History_Display
  procedure Debug.Take_History
  procedure Debug.Trace
  type Debug.Trace_Event
  procedure Debug.Trace_To_File
    

#Debugger Display Memory
  The Display Memory button on the Machine and Memory
  button set of the Debugger Palette option menu
  displays the contents of absolute memory.

  The display format is determined by the value of
  the Format option:

  * Control words (displayed when the value of Format
    is "Control") are interpreted according to the
    interpretation tag contained within the word.

  * Code segment words (displayed when the value of
    Format is "Code") are disassembled into their
    symbolic form.

  * All other types of memory units are displayed in
    hexadecimal.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Address
-------
  Enter the address from which to display memory. For
  the R1000, the address format is "(pound
  sign)segment_number, (pound sign)offset. The
  segment value specifies the segment number in
  hexadecimal notation. The offset specifies the
  location of the instruction in the segment.
  
  
>>Count
----
  Enter the number of items to display. The meaning
  of this option is interpreted differently for each
  target. For the R1000, Count specifies the number
  of memory units displayed (as specified by the
  Format option), starting from the memory address
  specified by the Address entry box. The default is
  one.
  
  
>>Format
-----
  Enter the format of the memory to be displayed. The
  meaning of this entry box is interpreted
  differently for each target. The legal values for
  the R1000 debugger are:

  * Control: Control word offset (memory unit is
    control stack words)

  * Typ: Type word offset (memory unit is type stack
    words).

  * Queue: Bit offset (the display always starts on a
    full word boundary; the starting offset will be
    the nearest full word that contains the bit
    specified by the offset section of the Address
    parameter).
                                                              
  * Data: Bit offset into the segment (the display
    always starts on a full word boundary; the
    starting offset will be the nearest full word
    that contains the bit specified by the offset
    section of the Address parameter).

  * Import: Word offset (memory unit is import
    words).

  * Code: Instruction offset (memory unit is
    instructions).

  * System: Bit offset (the display always starts on
    a full word boundary; the starting offset will be
    the nearest full word that contains the bit
    specified by the offset section of the Address
    parameter).


>>SEE ALSO
--------
 
Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Memory_Display  
    
    
    
#Debugger Display Registers 
  The Display Registers button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu modifies the value of a register with a given
  hexadecimal value. The Display Registers button is
  on the Machine Memory button set of the Debugger
  Palette option menu.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Register_Modify
    
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.

    
#Debugger Modify Memory
  The Modify Memory button on the Machine and Memory
  button set of the Debugger Palette option menu
  modifies up to a longword of memory.
  
  The Modify Memory button is on the Machine Memory
  button set of the Debugger Palette option menu.
          

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Memory_Modify

See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.


#Debugger Address to Location
  The Address to Location button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu displays the Ada source-code location of the
  specified runtime address.
  
  The Address to Location button is on the Machine
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Address_To_Location 
    
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.
    
#Debugger Location to Address
  The Location to Address button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu displays the runtime address of the generated
  code for a selected source-code location.
  
  The Location to Address button is on the Machine
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Location_To_Address 
        
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.
    
#Debugger Modify Register
  The Modify Register button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu modifies the value of a register with a given
  hexadecimal value.
  
  The Modify Register button is on the Machine Memory
  button set of the Debugger Palette option menu.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Register_Modify 
    
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.
    
#Debugger Object to Address
  The Object to Address button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu displays the runtime address of the generated
  code for a selected source-code object.
  
  The Object to Address button is on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Location_To_Address
    
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging
    
#Debugger Exception to Name
  The Exception to Name button on the Machine and
  Memory button set of the Debugger Palette option
  menu displays the Ada name of the exception
  corresponding to the address entered in the
  Implementation Name entry box.
  
  The Exception to Name button is located on the
  Machine Memory button set of the Debugger Palette
  option menu.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Exception_To_Name

See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.

#Debugger Target Request
  The Target Request button on the Target button set
  of the Debugger Palette option menu controls some
  operations of the target-resident debugger
  (RatCom).
   

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Target_Request
    
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.
    
#Debugger Invoke
  The Invoke button on the Target button set of the
  Debugger Palette option menu starts the debugger on
  the selected main unit after determining the target
  key.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Debugging (DEB) book of the Environment Reference 
Manual
  procedure Debug.Invoke
  
See the appropriate Cross-Development Facility (CDF)
manual for information on cross-debugging.


#Session Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Profile...
----------
  A profile is a set of response characteristics that
  tell commands:
  
  * How to respond to errors

  * Where to generate the logs that summarize command
    behavior

  * How to filter and format the messages that are
    recorded in these logs

  * Where to find the activity to use (when executing
    commands that compile and/or load programs
    written in subsystems)

  * Where to find the remote-passwords file and
    remote-sessions file to use when executing
    commands on remote systems

  This command displays the session response profile
  for the current session and allows you to reset any
  of the profile's component values. The session
  response profile for the current session is
  reflected in the values of the session switches
  with the processor name "Profile."


>>Searchlist
----------
  A searchlist is an ordered list of libraries that
  is associated with a user session. When you enter a
  command through a command window, the Environment
  searches through each of the libraries named in
  your searchlist until the command being entered is
  found.

  This command displays the searchlist for your
  current session. If a searchlist does not exist,
  one is created (based on the system default
  searchlist) and displayed in a window. From the
  window, the searchlist can be edited using commands
  from the Edit menu that apply to entries or
  commands from package !Commands.Search_List. You
  cannot use basic text editing operations in
  searchlists.
 
  For more information, see the introduction to
  package Search_List in the Session and Job
  Management (SJM) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual or the Environment help for
  !Commands.Search_List.


>>Session Switches
----------------
  Session switches control workspace characteristics
  that are subject to your personal preference. They
  control log files, library displays, debugger
  operations, window management, and networking
  operations. Session switches also determine the
  default activity for the session.

  This command opens an Environment window containing
  the session switches for your current session. If a
  set of session switches does not exist, one is
  created and displayed in a window. From the window,
  you can edit the session switches using commands
  from the Edit menu that apply to entries or
  commands from package !Commands.Switches. You
  cannot use basic text editing operations on session
  switches.

  For more information about session switches, see
  the Session Switches section of the Session and Job
  Management (SJM) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual.

  To display a library switch file, choose Compiler
  Switches from the Program menu.


>>Jobs=>
------
  A job consists of one or more commands that are
  executed together. For example, executing a command
  from a menu constitutes a single job; executing
  multiple commands in a command window also
  constitutes a single job. Jobs can also be
  initiated programmatically from other jobs using
  commands in package !Commands.Program.

  This submenu contains commands for displaying lists
  of and controlling jobs.
  
  For further information about job characteristics
  and job behavior, see the Key Concepts of the
  Session and Job Management (SJM) book of the
  Environment Reference Manual or the Environment
  help for package !Commands.Job.
   

>>End-of-Input
------------
  When executed from an Environment I/O window,
  signals the interacting program that no more input
  will be provided. For more information, see
  procedure !Commands.Text.End_Of_Input in the
  Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the
  Environment Reference Manual.


>>Screen=>
--------
  Contains commands for customizing and controlling
  the Access window and the set of windows in the
  Environment area.


#Profile
  Session:Profile displays the session response
  profile for the current session and allows you to
  reset any of the profile's component values. The
  session response profile for the current session is
  reflected in the values of the session switches
  with the processor name "Profile."

  This help entry provides a brief introduction to
  your session response profile and a description of
  the options in the Session:Profile dialog box for
  setting your session response profile.
  

>>WHAT IS A SESSION RESPONSE PROFILE?
----------------------------------- 
  The session response profile for a session provides
  the default response characteristics for all
  commands executed under that session. A command's
  response characteristics tell it:
  
  * How to respond to errors

  * Where to generate the logs that summarize command
    behavior

  * How to filter and format the messages that are
    recorded in these logs

  * Where to find the activity to use (when executing
    commands that compile and/or load programs written
    in subsystems)

  * Where to find the remote-passwords file and
    remote-sessions file to use when executing commands
    on remote systems

  The initial values for the session response profile
  for your default session (S_1) are inherited from
  system-defined default values. The initial values
  for subsequent session are inherited from your
  default session. Thus, you do not need to set your
  session response profile unless you want to change
  its values.
  
  You can override the session response profile for
  the duration of a particular job or Environment
  command by setting different response
  characteristics for that job or command. To set
  different response characteristics for a job, call
  procedures from package !Tools.Profile from within
  that job. To set different response characteristics
  for most Environment commands, use the Response
  parameter of the command. Note that you cannot
  override the session response profile when
  executing commands from Access menus, key bindings,
  and mouse bindings.
  
  For further information about using profiles, see
  the Key Concepts and package Profile in the Session
  and Job Management (SJM) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual. For further information about
  using the Response parameter to override the
  default response characteristics set in your
  session response profile, see Parameter-Value
  Conventions in the Reference Summary (RS) book of
  the Reference Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Prefix
------
  From each of the three option menus, choose the
  kind of prefix that is to appear, by default, in
  that position (first, middle, or third) before each
  message in the logs generated by the Environment.
  The options for each menu are:

  * Nil: Specifies an empty prefix. For example, if
    you choose to prefix each log message with only two
    prefixes, you should set the third prefix to Nil.

  * Time: Specifies the normal A.M./P.M. format for
    time, which includes hours, minutes, and seconds,
    such as 11:34:32 AM or 8:19:09 PM.

  * Hr_Mn_Sc: Specifies a military format for time,
    including hours, minutes, and seconds, such as
    19:54:04.

  * Hr_Mn: Specifies a military format for time,
    including hours and minutes, such as 21:08.

  * Date: Specifies a verbose format for the date,
    including the spelled-out month, the day of the
    month, and the year, such as June 30, 1991.

  * Mn_Dy_Yr: Specifies a short format for the date,
    including the numeric month, the day of the month,
    and the year, such as 06/30/91.

  * Dy_Mn_Yr: Specifies an abbreviated format for the
    date, including the day of the month, an
    abbreviation of the month, and the year, such as
    30-JUN-91.

  * Yr_Mn_Dy: Specifies a short format for the date,
    including the year, the numeric month, and the day
    of the month, such as 91/06/30.

  * Symbols: Specifies the symbols associated with
    the kind of message. These symbols denote the kind
    of message being added to the log, such as *** for
    errors or !!! for warnings. See the Filters in the
    dialog box or below for a list of message kinds and
    their associated symbols.


>>Reaction
--------
  From this option menu, choose what Environment
  commands should do, by default, in case of error:
  
  * Quit: Specifies that the command terminate at its
    first error. No exception is raised.

  * Propagate: Specifies that the command terminate
    at its first error. An exception is raised. If no
    other exception is defined for the command, the
    Profile.Error exception is raised.

  * Persevere: Specifies that the command continue
    executing as best it can after errors are
    discovered. No exception is raised.

  * Raise Error: Specifies that the command continue
    executing as best it can after errors are
    discovered. At some point, an exception is raised.
    If no other exception is defined for the command,
    the Profile.Error exception is raised.


>>Log File
--------
  From this option menu, choose the location to which
  log output is be directed by default:

  * Use Output: Specifies that log output should be
    sent to Current_Output. By default, Current_Output
    directs output to Standard_Output (an Environment
    I/O window); however, Current_Output can be
    redirected to another location such as a text file
    using the Log.Set_Output or Io.Set_Output
    Environment command.

  * Use Error: Specifies that log output should be
    sent to Current_Error. By default, Current_Error
    directs output to Standard_Error (the Environment
    message window); however, Current_Error can be
    redirected to another location such as a text file
    using the Log.Set_Error or Io.Set_Error Environment
    command.

  * Use Standard Output: Specifies that log output
    should be sent to Standard_Output, which is an
    Environment I/O window. Standard_Output cannot be
    redirected.

  * Use Standard Error: Specifies that log output
    should be sent to Standard_Error, which is the
    Environment message window. Standard_Error cannot
    be redirected.


>>Width
-----
  Enter the default maximum number of columns that
  lines in the logs can be. If a log message is
  longer than the width specified, the message is
  continued on the next line. Messages that have
  been continued are prefixed with the ellipsis (...)
  symbol. The maximum width is 1,023 columns.


>>Activity
--------
  Enter the pathname of the activity that is to be
  the default for all jobs executed under the current
  session. This activity is used by the Environment
  when you execute commands that are delivered or
  developed in subsystems. It is also used by
  commands that compile and/or load programs written
  in subsystems.  
  
  An activity maintains a mapping between subsystems
  and pairs of views. The pair consists of a spec
  view and a load view from that subsystem. An
  activity typically is used to specify an
  implementation from each subsystem to be used for
  execution.


>>Remote Passwords File
---------------------
  Enter the name of the remote-passwords file that is
  to be the default for the current session.

  Remote passwords files contain usernames and
  passwords required for remote operations.
  Remote-passwords files are used by commands that
  perform operations across a network, including
  commands that are part of the standard Rational
  Environment (such as those in !Commands.Ftp) and
  commands from other Rational products (such as the
  Rational Compilation Integrator). Using
  remote-passwords files enables you to perform
  remote operations without the necessity of
  supplying usernames and passwords directly to the
  networking command.


>>Remote Session File
-------------------
  Enter the name of the remote passwords file that is
  to be the default for the current session.

  A remote-sessions file is a text file that
  specifies which session (or account) should be used
  when logging into a remote machine.


>>Filters
-------
  Choose the kinds of messages you want included, by
  default, in the logs produced by the Environment.
  Each kind of message is associated with a
  three-character symbol. These symbols are noted in
  parentheses.

  * Auxiliaries (:::) specify a general message. This
    kind of message is provided by the Environment as
    commentary on the execution of commands.

  * Diagnostics (???) specify a debugging message.
    This kind of message is provided by the Environment
    as an aid in debugging commands.

  * Notes (---) specify a general message. This kind
    of message is provided by the Environment as
    commentary on the execution of commands.

  * Positives (+++) specify a message indicating
    positive progress. This kind of message is provided
    by the Environment when operations complete
    successfully.
 
  * Negatives (++*) specify a message indicating
    negative progress. This kind of message is provided
    by the Environment when operations do not complete
    successfully. Such conditions cause the error
    reaction to be taken by the command.

  * Positions (>>>) specify a message indicating the
    position in some object where an event, explained
    by another message, has occurred. This kind of
    message is provided by the Environment as an aid in
    locating errors and other events in large objects.

  * Warnings (!!!) specify a message that warns of
    some minor error. This kind of message indicates
    that the operation has found some condition that is
    not quite correct but is not serious enough to
    prevent the operation from continuing.

  * Errors (***) specify a message indicating a
    serious error. This kind of message indicates that
    the operation has found some condition that
    prevents the operation from completing
    successfully. This causes the error reaction to be
    taken by the command. A message of this kind may be
    accompanied by a negative message.

  * Exceptions (%%%) specify a message indicating
    that an exception was raised during the execution
    of the command. This kind of message indicates
    that the operation has found some condition that
    prevents the operation from continuing. This causes
    the error reaction to be taken by the command. A
    message of this kind may be accompanied by a
    negative message.

  * Sharps (###) specify a message that has no
    predefined meaning. This kind of message is not
    used by the Environment but can be used by users to
    insert messages into the log files for user-defined
    purposes.

  * Dollars ($$$) specify a message that has no
    predefined meaning. This kind of message is not
    used by the Environment but can be used by users to
    insert messages into the log files for user-defined
    purposes.

  * At Signs (@@@) specify a message that has no
    predefined meaning. This kind of message is not
    used by the Environment but can be used by users to
    insert messages into the log files for user-defined
    purposes.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Session and Job Management (SJM) book of the
Environment Reference Manual
  Key Concepts
  Session Switches        
  package Log
  package Profile
  package Remote_Passwords
  type Profile.Error_Reaction
  type Profile.Log_Output_File
  type Profile.Log_Prefix
  type Profile.Msg_Kind


#Session Jobs Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Show Jobs
---------
  Displays a list of all the jobs currently active on
  the system that are associated with the current
  user and session. This command lists:

  * The current user's login ID or username

  * The port number on which the user is logged in

  * The jobs associated with the user

  * The state of each job

  * The amount of time each job has been active

  * The name of each job

  This command is useful for obtaining a job number
  to be used in the Session:Jobs:Connect to Job,
  Enable Job, Disable Job, or Kill Job command.


>>Show All Jobs
-------------
  Displays a list of all the jobs currently active on
  the system, including those belonging to all users
  and the system itself (*SYSTEM). For each user,
  this command lists:

  * The user's login ID or username

  * The port number on which the user is logged in

  * The jobs associated with the user

  * The state of each job

  * The amount of time each job has been active

  * The name of each job

  This command is useful for obtaining a job number
  to be used in the Session:Jobs:Connect to Job,
  Enable Job, Disable Job, or Kill Job command.


>>Connect to Job...
-----------------
  Connects (attaches) the current session to a
  previously disconnected (detached) job. Connecting
  the session to a job causes the job to run in the
  foreground and displays the "...running" message in
  the banner of the message window. As a result,
  connecting the session to a job effectively
  suspends input from the keyboard until the job
  completes.


>>Disconnect Current Job
----------------------
  Disconnects (detaches) the current session from the
  current job, causing that job to run in the
  background and removing the "...running" message
  from the banner of the message window. Control of
  the keyboard, mouse, and menus is returned to the
  user.
  
  Note that you cannot disconnect from a job using
  the menus; you must use [Control][G]. This
  limitation is because while the "...running"
  message is displayed, the Environment queues any
  commands you enter and executes them after the
  current job has completed.
  
  The position of the cursor is cached at the
  beginning of a job. Thus, a job that requires
  knowledge of cursor position can be disconnected,
  leaving the user free to perform other commands.
  The same applies for resolution of any special
  names.


>>Disable Job...
--------------
  Temporarily stops execution of the specified job.
  The job is not terminated but is prevented from
  executing by the Environment.
  

>>Enable Job...
-------------
  Restarts execution of the specified (previously
  disabled) job.
  

>>Kill Job...
-----------
  Terminates execution of the specified job. All
  files declared as Current_Output, Current_Input, or
  Current_Error, or files on the current-output,
  current-input, or current-error stacks, are closed
  (see package Log in the Session and Job Management
  book of the Environment Reference Manual for more
  information about these stacks). All other files
  are abandoned, and temporary files are deleted.


#Connect to Job
  Session:Jobs:Connect to Job connects the current
  session to the specified job, bringing the job to
  the foreground and displaying the "...running"
  message in the banner of the message window.

  This command connects (attaches) the current
  session to a previously disconnected (detached)
  job. Connecting the session to a job causes the job
  to run in the foreground. As a result, connecting
  the session to a job effectively suspends input
  from the keyboard until the job completes.
  However, connected jobs can read keyboard input
  with facilities in package Window_Io (see the Data
  and Device Input/Output (DIO) book of the
  Environment Reference Manual). Connected jobs also
  can bring windows onto the screen.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Job Number
----------
  Enter the job identification number (also called
  job id or job number) of the job to which you want
  to connect.
 
  Job numbers are assigned by the Environment when
  jobs are created. The Environment assigns job
  numbers uniquely for each session in the range 0
  through 255. To display a list of jobs currently
  running and their associated job numbers, use the
  Session:Jobs:Show Jobs or Session:Jobs:Show All
  Jobs command.

  The job number entered in this entry box must be
  associated with the current session. The default,
  0, connects you to the most recently interrupted
  job for the current session.
  
  This entry box has no effect if the Last Job
  Disconnected box is checked.


>>Last Job Disconnected
---------------------
  Check this box to connect to the job from which you
  most recently disconnected.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Session and Job Management (SJM) book of the
Environment Reference Manual
  procedure Job.Connect


#Job Enable/Disable/Kill
  Session:Jobs:Enable restarts execution of the
  specified (previously disabled) job.

  Session:Jobs:Disable temporarily stops execution of
  the specified job. The job is not terminated but is
  prevented from executing by the Environment.

  Session:Jobs:Kill terminates execution of the
  specified job. All files declared as
  Current_Output, Current_Input, or Current_Error, or
  files on the current-output, current-input, or
  current-error stacks, are closed (see package Log
  in the Session and Job Management book of the
  Environment Reference Manual for more information
  about these stacks). All other files are abandoned,
  and temporary files are deleted.
  
  A single dialog box is used for all three of these
  commands. Note, however, that the operation
  performed when you click the OK button depends on
  the menu item you chose and which displayed the
  dialog box. If you are uncertain which menu item
  produced the dialog box, you can click the Cancel
  button to remove the dialog box without affecting
  any jobs.

  Note that you cannot enable, disable, or kill a job
  from the Access menus while there is a job running
  in the foreground under your current session
  (indicated by the "...running" message in the
  banner of the message window). First, you must
  disconnect from the current job by pressing
  [Control][G].


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Job Number
----------
  Enter the job identification number (also called
  job id or job number) for the job to be enabled,
  disabled, or killed.
 
  Job numbers are assigned by the Environment when
  jobs are created. The Environment assigns job
  numbers uniquely for each session in the range 0
  through 255. To display a list of jobs currently
  running and their associated job numbers, use the
  Session:Jobs:Show Jobs or Session:Jobs:Show All
  Jobs command.
  
  When disabling or enabling a job, a value of 0
  indicates all the jobs running under the specified
  session, provided that session belongs to you; the
  value 0 cannot be used to indicate all jobs for a
  session that belongs to another user. When killing
  a job, you cannot use the value 0 to indicate all
  the jobs running under the specified session, even
  if that session is your own.
 

>>Session
-------
  Enter the name of the session with which the job is
  associated. Special names, wildcards, and context
  characters can be used if they resolve to a single
  object. The name in this box is resolved with
  respect to the current library. The name must
  resolve to a session object--for example,
  !Users.Robinson.S_1. The default value, the null
  string, specifies the current session.


>>RESTRICTIONS
------------

  To disable, enable, or kill jobs that belong to
  another user, you must have read access to that
  user's home world or be operating in privileged
  mode (belong to the access-control group Privileged
  and have enabled privileges).


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Session and Job Management (SJM) book of the
Environment Reference Manual
  procedure Job.Disable
  procedure Job.Enable
  procedure Job.Kill



#Session Screen Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Screen Push
-----------
  Saves the current "screen" on a stack for retrieval
  at a later time. (In Access, the "screen" is the
  set of Environment windows currently displayed in
  the Environment area of the Access window.) This
  command saves the Environment windows currently
  displayed, including their size, the cursor
  location, and the current viewport into the window.
  
  The 100 most recent screen saves are kept on the
  stack. The screen stack feature is useful when you
  are performing one task with a specific set of
  windows and then need to perform another task using
  a different set of windows. You can save and later
  retrieve either one or both of the sets of windows.
  For more information, see package Editor.Screen in
  the Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.
  

>>Screen Pop
----------                                                
  Retrieves the most recently-saved "screen" and
  displays it in the Environment area of the Access
  window. (In Access, the "screen" is a set of
  Environment windows that have been displayed in the
  Environment area of the Access window.)

  If you have changed the contents of any of the
  windows since they were saved, the new contents
  will be shown when the windows are retrieved from
  the stack. More specifically, this means that if
  you abandon a window, it will not be displayed when
  you retrieve the set of windows that contains it; a
  blank window will appear in its space. If you have
  altered the contents of the window---for example,
  adding text to the window---the new contents of the
  window will be displayed.  
  
  The message window will be displayed in its current
  state, rather than the state it was in when saved.
  Also, command windows will be in the state they
  were in when last used, rather than the state they
  were in when they were saved.
  
  For more information, see package Editor.Screen in
  the Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.


>>Window Frames...
-------------
  Allows you to set the maximum number of frames the
  system will maintain in the Environment area of the
  Access window.
  

>>Save Button Panel
-----------------
  Saves your current user-defined buttons. The
  buttons are stored on your workstation in a file in
  your home directory called
  .Rational-Access-buttons. The buttons are displayed
  in each Access window you create. Thus, buttons are
  user-specific; they are not session-specific.


>>Full Reset
----------
  Resets the Access window. Resetting the window
  includes:
  
  * Completely clearing the Environment area of the
    Access window
  
  * Ensuring that Session:Screen:Rational Mode is not
    set
  
  * Ensuring that Session:Screen:Inverse Video is not
    set
  
  After resetting the Access window, you can either:

  * Repaint the Environment area of the Access window
    by pressing [Control][L].
    
  * Obtain a telnet prompt by pressing [Control][]].
    From the telnet prompt, you can enter "z" to put
    the telnet session in the background and display a
    UNIX prompt.
  
  If you obtain a telnet or UNIX prompt and are
  having problems with keystrokes, check to ensure
  that Rational Mode is not set.
  

>>Rational Mode
-------------
  For the most part, Rational Access manages the
  value of the Rational Mode check box. If, however,
  you find that key and mouse operations are not
  being interpreted correctly, you should verify that
  Rational Mode is set correctly. For example, if
  none of the menu commands activate when clicked,
  you should verify the Rational Mode setting:

  * Rational Mode should be set whenever you are
    logged into and working in an Environment session
    through the Access window.
  
  * Rational Mode should not be set if you are
    entering commands at a telnet or UNIX prompt in the
    Access window.
  

>>Inverse Video
-------------
  Switches the text color in the Environment area of
  the Access window with the background color of the
  area.


>>Visual Bell
-----------
  Controls whether the Access window flashes instead
  of beeping when the Environment discovers an error.
  For this setting to have an effect, the
  Session.Beep_On_Errors switch for the current
  session must be True.


#Window Frames
  Session:Screen:Window Frames allows you to set the
  maximum number of frames the system will maintain
  in the Environment area of the Access window.
  
  When you first log into an Environment session, the
  Environment creates the number of frames specified
  in the Session.Window_Frames_Startup switch for
  that session. (The default for Access is 3 frames.)
  Once you have logged in, the Environment maintains
  the number of frames specified in the
  Session.Window_Frames switch for that session. (The
  default for Access is 3 frames.) (To display your
  session switches, use Session:Session Switches.)
  
  You can use Session:Screen:Window Frames to
  override the value of the Session.Window_Frames
  switch, causing the Environment to maintain the
  number of frames you specify. This setting is
  preserved until you log out or reset it.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Maximum Number of Window Frames
-------------------------------
  Choose the maximum number of window frames the
  Environment is to maintain in the Environment area
  of the Access window. The default value is 3.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Frames

#Tools Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Mail=>
------
  Provides operations for creating, sending, reading,
  replying to, forwarding, and remailing electronic
  mail messages.


>>Insight=>
---------
  Provides operations for using Insight. Insight is a
  reverse-engineering and browsing tool that
  generates diagrams of software systems developed
  using the Rational Environment. Insight uses a
  subset of the module-diagram notation defined by
  Booch. Insight diagrams contain:

  * Icons representing subsystems, libraries, and Ada
    compilation units.
    
  * Arcs representing dependencies ("with"ing
    relationships among Ada units and importing
    relationships among subsystems).
    
  You can use Insight to:
  
  * Browse the Environment to gain a better
    understanding of your software.
    
  * Save and print diagrams to include in documents.
  
  * Edit diagrams to improve their layout, to
    represent partitionings of your software that are
    not realized as libraries or subsystems, to
    experiment with alternative software architectures.
  

>>RDF=>
-----
  Provides operations for using the Rational Design
  Facility (RDF). RDF is a set of tools and
  mechanisms to automate the design and documentation
  of software systems. Configurations of these tools
  and mechanisms can be constructed to support
  various design methodologies. Rational delivers a
  specific configuration: Rational Design Facility:
  DOD-STD-2167A (RDF: 2167A), with the following
  capabilities:

  * Support for automated generation of
    2167A-compliant documents

  * Design capture and consistency checking

  * Requirements tracking and traceability

  * Enforcement of design and implementation
    standards

  * Enforcement of transitions among lifecycle phases


>>RPI=>
-----
  Provides operations for using the Rational
  Publishing Interface: Interleaf(TM) TPS product
  (RPI). RPI bridges between the Rational Design
  Facility (RDF), which helps to automate the design
  and documentation of software systems, and
  Interleaf's Technical Publishing Software(TM)
  (TPS), which formats text and graphics.


>>RTI=>
-----
  Provides operations for using the Rational Teamwork
  Interface (RTI). RTI works with two other products:
  the Rational Design Facility: DOD-STD-2167A (RDF:
  2167A), a tool that automates the design and
  documentation of software systems, and Cadre
  Teamwork(R), a CASE tool for performing
  requirements analysis and design. RTI allows you to
  augment your Teamwork models with DOD-STD-2167A
  information and import the information to RDF,
  which you can use to generate 2167A-compliant
  documents and continue project development.


>>Macro=>
-------
  Provides commands for creating, executing, and
  binding keyboard macros. A macro is a sequence of
  Environment keystrokes that can be invoked with a
  single keystroke or key combination. Macros can be
  bound to a key or referenced as the current macro.


>>Operator=>
----------
  Provides commands for performing system-management
  operations, such as creating users, managing
  access-control groups, making backups of the
  system, and shutting down the system. The commands
  on this submenu are used primarily by system
  managers, operators, and Rational technical
  representatives. All users can use the Create/Edit
  User command to change their passwords.


>>Files Info=>
------------
  Provides commands for obtaining information about
  objects, such as their name, their version, and any
  locks on them.


>>System Info=>
-------------
  Provides commands for obtaining information about
  the system, such as the users that are currently
  logged in, the disk space available and used, the
  configuration of the system, and the system load.



#Tools Mail Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Read Mail
---------
  Displays your main mailbox. If your main mailbox is
  already displayed, this command refreshes the
  mailbox, ensuring that it lists all
  recently-received mail messages. For more
  information, see the Environment help for
  !Commands.Mail.Edit.


>>New Mail Message
---------------- 
  Creates an open template for an electronic mail
  message, which you can fill in and send. By
  default, the template contains several fields:
  
  * From: By default the username under which you are
    logged into the Environment. If you would like the
    return path to display another username or e-mail
    address, enter that username or address here.
    
  * To: Enter the e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas.
      
  * Cc: Enter other e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas.
    
  * Subject: Enter a brief description of the
    contents or purpose of the message.
    
  * The final prompt indicates the area in which you
    can enter the body to the message.  

  For more information, see the Environment help for
  Mail.Send.


>>Check Mail Message
------------------
  Checks the mail message in the current window to
  ensure that it is syntactically and semantically
  correct. In particular, this command checks to
  ensure the existence of all local destinations in
  the To field. Errors in the mail message are
  underlined.


>>Send Mail Message
-----------------
  Sends the mail message in the current window. Once
  a message has been sent it cannot be retrieved.


>>Reply
-----
  Creates a reply template, which you can fill in and
  send, for the current mail message or the selected
  message in the current mailbox. By default, the
  template contains several fields:
  
  * From: By default the username under which you are
    logged into the Environment. If you would like the
    return path to display another username or e-mail
    address, enter that username or address here.
      
  * To: Enter the e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    this field contains the return path of the sender
    of the message to which you are replying.
      
  * Cc: Enter other e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    this field is empty.
    
  * Subject: Enter a brief description of the
    contents or purpose of the message. By default, the
    Subject field contains "Re:" followed by the
    subject from the message to which you are replying.
    
  * The final prompt indicates the area in which you
    can enter the body to the message.
    
  * If the value of the Mail_Include_Text_In_Reply
    switch for the current session is True, the
    template also contains the full text of the message
    to which you are replying.

  For more information, see the Environment help for
  Mail.Reply.


>>Reply to All
------------
  Creates a reply template, which you can fill in and
  send, for the current mail message or the selected
  message in the current mailbox. The template
  contains the same fields as that produced by the
  Reply command, except for one:

  * Cc: Enter other e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    this field contains the e-mail addresses that were
    in the Cc field of the message to which you are
    replying.
  

>>Forward
-------
  Creates a forwarding template, which you can fill
  in and send, for the current mail message or the
  selected message in the current mailbox. By
  default, the template contains several fields:
  
  * From: By default the username under which you are
    logged into the Environment. If you would like the
    return path to display another username or e-mail
    address, enter that username or address here.
    
  * To: Enter the e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas.
      
  * Cc: Enter other e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    this field is empty.
    
  * Subject: Enter a brief description of the
    contents or purpose of the message. By default, the
    Subject field contains "From:" followed by the name
    of the sender and the subject from the message you
    are forwarding.
    
  * The final prompt indicates the area in which you
    can enter the body to the message.
    
  * If the value of the Mail_Include_Text_In_Reply
    switch for the current session is True, the
    template also contains the full text of the message
    to which you are replying.

  For more information, see the Environment help for
  Mail.Forward.


>>Remail
------
  Creates a forwarding template, which you can fill
  in and send, for the current mail message or the
  selected message in the current mailbox. The
  template contains several fields of interest:
  
  * From: By default the username under which you are
    logged into the Environment. If you would like the
    return path to display another username or e-mail
    address, enter that username or address here.
    
  * To: Enter the e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    the To field contains the same e-mail addresses as
    the message you are remailing.
      
  * Cc: Enter other e-mail address(s) to which the
    message is to be sent. Multiple addresses can be
    entered by separating them with commas. By default,
    this field is empty.
    
  * Subject: Enter a brief description of the
    contents or purpose of the message. By default, the
    Subject field contains subject from the message you
    are remailing.
    
  * The address information is followed by the
    complete contents of the message you are remailing.

  For more information, see the Environment help for
  Mail.Remail.
                   

>>Delete Mail Message
-------------------
  Deletes the mail message in the current window or
  the selected mail message in the current mailbox.
  If the Mail_Retain_Deleted_Messages switch for the
  current session is set to True, the "deleted"
  message is marked with a "D"; it is not actually
  deleted until you expunge the mailbox. Until the
  mailbox is expunged, you can use Undelete Message
  to undelete such messages. If the
  Mail_Retain_Deleted_Messages switch is set to
  False, the deleted message cannot be recovered.


>>Undelete Mail Message
---------------------
  Undeletes the mail message in the current window or
  the selected mail message in the current mailbox.
  Mail messages that have been marked for deletion
  and can be undeleted are indicated by a "D" next
  to them in the mailbox.


>>Expunge Mailbox
---------------
  Permanently removes any mail messages that have
  been marked for deletion (with a "D" next to their
  entry in the mailbox). Messages that have been
  expunged cannot be recovered.


>>Sort Mailbox
------------
  Rearranges the list of messages in your mailbox.
  You can sort mail messages based on who they are
  from, the date and time they were received, the
  date and time they were sent, whether or not they
  have been read, and whether or not they are marked
  for deletion. 


#Sort Mailbox
  Tools:Mail:Sort Mailbox rearranges the list of
  messages in your mailbox. You can sort mail
  messages based on who they are from, the date and
  time they were received, the date and time they
  were sent, whether or not they have been read, and
  whether or not they are marked for deletion.

  The sort order set by this command is maintained
  until you log out or resort your mailbox. The next
  time you log in, your mailbox will be sorted
  according to the sort order set in the
  Mailbox_Sort_Order session switch for the current
  session.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Mail Sort Order
---------------
  Check the radio button indicating the criteria by
  which to sort your mail messages:

  * From: Displays messages in alphabetical order
    based on the value of the From field in each
    message.

  * Date Received: Displays messages in chronological
    order based on the date they were received.

  * Date Sent: Displays messages in chronological
    order based on the date they were sent.

  * Read / Unread: Displays messages that have been
    read in chronological order, followed by messages
    that have not been read, also in chronological
    order.

  * Deleted: Displays messages that are not marked
    for deletion in chronological order, followed by
    messages that are marked for deletion, also in
    chronological order.

  The corresponding "reverse" options sort mail
  messages based on the same criteria but list the
  messages in reverse order. For example, Date
  Received (reverse) lists the most recently received
  messages at the top of your mailbox.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Network Mail User's Guide

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment
Reference Manual
  procedure Common.Sort_Image


#Tools Insight Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Invoke...
---------
  Starts Insight for interactive use. Starting
  Insight this way brings up the Insight main window
  on your X display. You perform all subsequent
  Insight operations (including exiting from Insight)
  by choosing commands from the menus in Insight
  windows, as described in the Insight User's Manual.


>>Create Diagram...
-----------------
  Creates and saves an Insight diagram as an
  Environment file. The diagram is generated as a
  windowless operation -- that is, you do not need to
  be logged into an X display in order to generate
  the diagram. When you want to see the diagram you
  generated, you must invoke Insight for interactive
  use and then use interactive commands to open the
  diagram file.


>>Delete Diagram...
-----------------
  Deletes one or more diagram files from the
  Environment. This operation deletes only diagram
  files, unlike the more general Environment delete
  operations.


>>Print Diagram...
----------------
  Queues the specified diagram directly to a printer
  *or* generates and saves a printable diagram file
  for that diagram. In either case, the operation is
  windowless -- that is, you do not need to be logged
  into an X display in order to print the diagram.


#Insight Invoke 
  Tools:Insight:Invoke starts Insight for interactive
  use. Starting Insight this way brings up the
  Insight main window on your X display. You perform
  all subsequent Insight operations (including
  exiting from Insight) by choosing commands from the
  menus in Insight windows, as described in the
  Insight User's Manual.

  Invoking Insight involves invoking two software
  components:
    
  * The Data Manager on the R1000, which identifies
    the objects and dependencies being diagrammed
       
  * The Illustrator on a UNIX workstation, which
    generates the diagrams from the object and
    dependency information
       
  By default, this menu entry is equivalent to the
  Insight.Invoke command, which invokes both
  components together.

  When you select the Data Manager Only option, this
  menu entry is equivalent to the Insight.Invoke_Data-
  _Manager command, which allows you to invoke the
  components separately. Your system manager can tell
  you whether this is necessary.
  
  The Insight Invoke options and text boxes are
  described below. See the introduction to package
  Insight in the Insight User's Manual for complete
  information about what you need to start Insight.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Data Manager Only
-----------------
  Leave this option unselected if you want standard
  Insight startup. Under standard startup, the Data
  Manager on the R1000 invokes the Illustrator on the
  workstation using rsh (remote shell).

  Select this option if you want nonstandard Insight
  startup (necessary only if your site does not allow
  the use of rsh.) Nonstandard startup invokes only
  the Data Manager on the R1000; you must enter a
  command such as the following on your workstation
  to start the Illustrator:
  
/vendor/rational/insight/release.1_3_0/illustrator R1000 port
    
  * See the output window on the Environment for the
    value of R1000 and port. 
            
  * See your system manager for the illustrator
    command's actual pathname at your site.


>>Object Context
--------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment context
  that contains the objects you want to diagram.
  Insight commands use this context to resolve
  relative names when creating diagrams.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  From an Insight window, you can later change the
  object context interactively using the
  Options:Object Context command.


>>Diagram Context
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment
  location for storing and retrieving diagrams.
  Insight commands use the diagram context to resolve
  relative names when saving or opening diagram
  files.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  From an Insight window, you can later change the
  diagram context interactively using the
  Options:Diagram Context command.


>>X Display
---------
  Fill in this entry box with the name of the X
  display to be used for displaying Insight windows.
  You must specify a string that has the same syntax
  as the value of the -display option common to all X
  applications. 
 
  Example: if your X display is on a workstation
  called unicorn and that workstation is not the one
  running the Illustrator, you enter unicorn:0.
  
  By default, this entry box specifies the local
  display of the workstation running the Illustrator.
  To determine the default, Insight appends the
  suffix :0 to the name specified by the Remote
  Machine entry box.


>>Remote Machine  
--------------
  Fill in this entry box with name of the workstation
  that runs the Illustrator.
  
  By default, this entry box displays the workstation
  name specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library
  switch for the library entered in the Object
  Context entry box. If no name is specified by this
  switch, the value of the Session_Ftp-
  .Remote_Machine session switch is displayed. If no
  known workstation name is specified or found, the
  entry box is left blank.


>>Remote Username
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with your username on the
  workstation that runs the Illustrator.

  By default, this entry box displays the username
  specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library switch
  for the library entered in the Object Context entry
  box. If no name is specified by this switch, an
  attempt is made to obtain the username via the
  Rpc_Access_Utilities.Remote_Username procedure. If
  this attempt fails, the username for the current
  R1000 session is displayed.
 

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Insight User's Manual
  procedure Insight.Invoke
  procedure Insight.Invoke_Data_Manager


#Insight Create Diagram
  Tools:Insight:Create Diagram creates and saves an
  Insight diagram as an Environment file. The diagram
  is generated as a windowless operation -- that is,
  you do not need to be logged into an X display in
  order to generate the diagram. When you want to
  see the diagram you generated, you must invoke
  Insight for interactive use and then use
  interactive commands to open the diagram file.

  When you select the Defining Diagram option, this
  menu entry is equivalent to the
  Insight_Batch.Create_Defining_Diagram command. When
  you select the Composite Diagram option, this menu
  entry is equivalent to the
  Insight_Batch.Create_New_Diagram command.
  
  The Insight Create Diagram options and entry boxes
  are described below. See the Package Insight_Batch
  chapter of the Insight User's Manual for complete
  information.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Defining Diagram
----------------
  Select this option to generate the defining diagram
  for an Environment subsystem, world, or directory.
  A defining diagram shows the contents (which is in
  a sense the definition) of an Environment
  structure. When you start Insight for interactive
  use, you can open defining diagrams directly or you
  can traverse to them from other diagrams.
  
  Selecting this option causes the related entry box
  to be labeled Naming Expression for Subsystem or
  Library.


>>Composite Diagram
-----------------
  Select this option to generate a composite diagram
  for a set of Environment objects. A composite
  diagram is composed of icons, one for each
  specified object. You must select the Composite
  Diagram option if you want to generate a diagram
  for objects that do not reside in the same
  subsystem or library.

  Selecting this option causes the related entry box
  to be labeled Naming Expression.


>>Object Context
--------------
  Fill in this entry box with the desired context for
  specifying the objects to be diagrammed.

  * This context is used for name resolution if you
    specify a simple name or relative name in the entry
    box labeled Naming Expression/Naming Expression for
    Subsystem or Library.

  * This context is ignored if you specify a fully
    qualified pathname in that entry box.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  Whenever you enter a different object context in
  this text box, click on Filter to update the list
  box so that it displays the contents of the context
  you just specified.


>>Naming Expression
-----------------
  Appears when you select the Composite Diagram
  option. (If you selected the Defining Diagram
  option, see Naming Expression for Subsystem or
  Library, below.)
  
  Fill in this entry box with a naming expression
  that resolves to the set of Environment objects you
  want represented in the composite diagram. This
  naming expression must resolve to one or more
  subsystems, worlds, directories, and/or Ada units.

  Multiple objects can be specified using wildcards,
  indirect files, context prefixes, set notation, and
  attributes. If you specify a simple name or other
  relative pathname, the name is resolved relative to
  the Object Context. If you specify a fully
  qualified pathname, the Object Context is ignored.
  
  By default, this entry box contains the name of the
  object context. You can click on one of the names
  in the list box to put that name into the entry
  box. Because you normally want to diagram more than
  just a single object, you can then enter additional
  naming expression characters around this name.
  
  Following are examples of some useful naming
  expressions:

  * All the objects in the current object context: @

  * All the objects in a library: 
      !users.sjl.my_library.@

  * All the subsystems in a library except SS1 (a
    utilities subsystem that has dependencies from all
    other subsystems):
      !users.sjl.my_library[@'C(subsystem), ~ss1]

  * All the Ada units in a specific load view of a
    subsystem in the current object context:
      my_subsystem.rev1_3_0.units.?'c(ada)

  * All the Ada units in the load view listed for the
    subsystem in the current activity:  
      my_subsystem'view.units.?'c(ada)

  * All the Ada units in the Tools subdirectory of
    the same load view:
      my_subsystem'view.tools.?'c(ada)

  * All the Ada units in the Units directories of the
    spec and load views of the subsystems SS1 and SS2:
      [ss1,ss2].['spec_view,'view].units.?'c(ada)


>>Naming Expression for Subsystem or Library
------------------------------------------
  Appears when you select the Defining Diagram
  option. (If you selected the Composite Diagram
  option, see Naming Expression, above.)
  
  Fill in this entry box with a naming expression
  that resolves to the Environment subsystem, world,
  or directory whose contents you want represented in
  the defining diagram. 
  
  The naming expression must resolve to a unique
  object, although it can include wildcards and
  attributes. If you specify a simple name or other
  relative pathname, the name is resolved relative to
  the Object Context. If you specify a fully
  qualified pathname, the Object Context is ignored.
  
  By default, this entry box contains the name of the
  object context. You can click on one of the names
  in the list box to put that name into the entry
  box.


>>Diagram Context
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment
  location in which you save diagrams:
  
  * This context is used for name resolution if you
    specify a simple name or relative name in the
    Diagram Name text box.

  * This context is ignored if you specify a fully
    qualified pathname in the Diagram Name entry box.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  Whenever you enter a different diagram context in
  this entry box, click on Filter to update the list
  box so that it lists the diagrams in the context
  you just specified.


>>Diagram Name
------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment name
  for the diagram you are generating.
  
  If you specify a simple name or other relative
  pathname, the name is resolved relative to the
  Diagram Context. If you specify a fully qualified
  pathname, the Diagram Context is ignored.
  
  You can click on one of the names in the list box
  to put that name into the entry box. Note that the
  list box contains only diagram names.
  

>>Caption
-------
  Fill in this entry box with a caption for the
  diagram.
  
  You can use a caption to associate descriptive
  commentary with the diagram. When the diagram is
  displayed, the caption appears in the status area
  at the bottom of the diagram.
  

>>Remote Machine
--------------
  Fill in this entry box with name of the workstation
  that runs the Illustrator.
  
  By default, this entry box displays the workstation
  name specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library
  switch for the library entered in the Object
  Context entry box. If no name is specified by this
  switch, the value of the Session_Ftp.Remote_Machine
  session switch is displayed. If no known
  workstation name is specified or found, the entry
  box is left blank.


>>Remote Username
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with your username on the
  workstation that runs the Illustrator.

  By default, this entry box displays the username
  specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library switch
  for the library entered in the Object Context entry
  box. If no name is specified by this switch, an
  attempt is made to obtain the username via the
  Rpc_Access_Utilities.Remote_Username procedure. If
  this attempt fails, the username for the current
  R1000 session is displayed.


>>Filter
------
  Click on Filter after specifying a different Object
  Context and/or Diagram Context. Clicking on Filter
  updates the appropriate list boxes so that they
  list the contents of the currently specified
  contexts.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Insight User's Manual
  package Insight_Batch  
  procedure Insight_Batch.Create_Defining_Diagram
  procedure Insight_Batch.Create_New_Diagram



#Insight Delete Diagram
  Tools:Insight:Delete Diagram deletes one or more
  diagram files from the Environment. This operation
  deletes only diagram files, unlike the more general
  Environment delete operations.

  This menu entry is equivalent to the
  Insight_Batch.Delete_Diagram command.
  
  Note: Do not attempt to delete an individual group
  diagram, even though you can specify such a diagram
  by name. Deleting an individual group diagram
  corrupts the group-diagram tree and causes icons to
  be lost from it irrecoverably. The only safe way to
  delete a group diagram is to delete the composite
  or defining diagram in which it is rooted; deleting
  a root diagram automatically deletes all group
  diagrams associated with it.

  The Insight Delete Diagram options and entry boxes
  are described below. See the Package Insight_Batch
  chapter of the Insight User's Manual for complete
  information.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Diagram Context
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment
  location that contains the diagrams you want to
  delete:
  
  * This context is used for name resolution if you
    specify a simple name or relative name in the
    Diagram Name text box.

  * This context is ignored if you specify a fully
    qualified pathname in the Diagram Name entry box.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  Whenever you enter a different diagram context in
  this text box, click on Filter to update the list
  box so that it displays the contents of the context
  you just specified.


>>Diagram Name
------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment name of
  one or more diagrams to be deleted.
  
  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to one or more Environment objects;
  however, of these object, only diagrams are
  deleted.
  
  Multiple objects can be specified using wildcards,
  indirect files, context prefixes, set notation and
  attributes. For example, you can use the wildcard @
  to delete all of the diagrams located in the
  diagram context. (Note that although @ matches all
  simple names in the Diagram Context, only diagrams
  are deleted.)
  
  If you specify a simple name or other relative
  pathname, the name is resolved relative to the
  Diagram Context. If you specify a fully qualified
  pathname, the Diagram Context is ignored.
  
  You can click on one of the names in the list box
  to put that name into the entry box. Note that the
  list box contains only diagram names.


>>Filter
------
  Click on Filter after specifying a different
  Diagram Context. Clicking on Filter updates the
  list box so that it lists the contents of the
  currently specified diagram context.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Insight User's Manual
  package Insight_Batch
  procedure Insight_Batch.Delete_Diagram


#Insight Print Diagram
  Tools:Insight:Print Diagram queues the specified
  diagram directly to a printer *or* generates and
  saves a printable diagram file for that diagram. In
  either case, the operation is windowless -- that
  is, you do not need to be logged into an X display
  in order to print the diagram.

  When you select the File option, this menu entry is
  equivalent to the Insight_Batch.Generate_Postscript
  command. When you select the Queue option, this
  menu entry is equivalent to the
  Insight_Batch.Queue_Postscript command.

  By default, this menu entry prints large,
  multi-page diagrams on standard U.S. letter-sized
  paper. Click on the Options button to change format
  characteristics such as the diagram's orientation
  on the page, the desired paper size, margins,
  scale, fonts, and so on. If you want to format a
  diagram for inclusion in a document, you must
  select the Encapsulated Postscript print option.

  The Insight Print Diagram options and entry boxes
  are described below. See the Package Insight_Batch
  chapter of the Insight User's Manual for complete
  information.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Queue
-----
  Select this option to send to a diagram to a
  printer. A temporary printable diagram file is
  generated and then discarded after the print job
  completes. If you want to save a printable diagram
  file, for example, to include in a document, select
  the File option instead.

  Selecting this option automatically deselects the
  File option and causes the related entry box to be
  labeled Printer.


>>Printer
-------
  Appears when you select the Queue option. (If you
  selected the File option, see Filename, below.)

  Fill in this entry box with the name of the printer
  to which you want to send the diagram. You can
  enter the desired name or select the name from the
  list box. See your system manager if the printer
  you want does not appear in the list box.
   

>>File
----
  Select this option to generate and save a printable
  diagram file. You must then use Environment print
  operations (available in Access as File:Print) to
  queue the printable diagram file to a printer.

  Selecting this option automatically deselects the
  Queue option and causes the related entry box to be
  labeled Filename.
  

>>Filename
--------
  Appears when you select the File option. (If you
  selected the Queue option, see Printer, above.)

  Fill in this entry box with the name under which
  the printable diagram file is to be saved.
  
  By default, the text field contains the filename
  that initially appears in the Diagram Name entry
  box, with the suffix _Ps appended.

  If you specify a simple name or other relative
  pathname, the name is resolved relative to the
  Diagram Context. For example, if you specify a
  simple name, the printable diagram file is saved
  with that name in the Diagram Context. If you
  specify a fully qualified pathname, the Diagram
  Context is ignored.


>>Diagram Context
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment
  location that contains the diagram to be printed or
  put into printable form:
  
  * This context is used for name resolution if you
    specify a simple name or relative name in the
    Diagram Name text box.

  * This context is ignored if you specify a fully
    qualified pathname in the Diagram Name entry box.

  You can specify any Environment naming expression
  that resolves to a unique subsystem, view, world,
  or directory. By default, this entry box names the
  library that contains the Environment cursor at the
  time the dialog box is brought up.
  
  Whenever you enter a different diagram context in
  this entry box, click on Filter to update the list
  box so that it displays the contents of the context
  you just specified.


>>Diagram Name
------------
  Fill in this entry box with the Environment name of
  the diagram you want to print or put into printable
  form.
  
  If you specify a simple name or other relative
  pathname, the name is resolved relative to the
  Diagram Context. If you specify a fully qualified
  pathname, the Diagram Context is ignored.
  
  You can click on one of the names in the list box
  to put that name into the entry box. Note that the
  list box contains only diagram names.


>>Remote Machine
--------------
  Fill in this entry box with name of the workstation
  that runs the Illustrator.
  
  By default, this entry box displays the workstation
  name specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library
  switch for the library entered in the Diagram
  Context entry box. If no name is specified by this
  switch, the value of the Session_Ftp.Remote_Machine
  session switch is displayed. If no known
  workstation name is specified or found, the entry
  box is left blank.


>>Remote Username
---------------
  Fill in this entry box with your username on the
  workstation that runs the Illustrator.

  By default, this entry box displays the username
  specified in the Ftp.Remote_Machine library switch
  for the library entered in the Diagram Context
  entry box. If no name is specified by this switch,
  an attempt is made to obtain the username via the
  Rpc_Access_Utilities.Remote_Username procedure. If
  this attempt fails, the username for the current
  R1000 session is displayed.


>>Filter
------
  Click on Filter after specifying a different
  Diagram Context. Clicking on Filter updates the
  list box so that it lists the contents of the
  currently specified context.
  

>>Options
-------
  Click on this button to bring up the Print Options
  dialog box. You can use this dialog box
  characteristics such as the diagram's orientation
  on the page, the desired paper size, margins,
  scale, fonts, and so on.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Insight User's Manual  
  package Insight_Batch
  procedure Insight_Batch.Generate_Postscript
  procedure Insight_Batch.Queue_Postscript



#Insight Options
  The Insight Options dialog box (produced by the
  Options button in the Tools:Insight:Print Diagram
  dialog box) allows you to set various format
  characteristics of printed diagrams and printable
  diagram files.

  The Insight Print Options dialog box options and
  entry boxes are described below. See the Package
  Insight_Batch chapter of the Insight User's Manual
  for complete information. See also File:Print in
  the Insight User's Manual.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Best
----   
  Select this option to let Insight choose the
  orientation (Landscape or Portrait) that requires
  the least number of pages. If the two orientations
  result in the same number of pages, Insight chooses
  the orientation that results in the largest scale.


>>Landscape
--------- 
  Select this option to print the diagram so that its
  pages are wider than they are high, giving the
  diagram a horizontal orientation.


>>Portrait
-------- 
  Select this option to print the diagram so that its
  pages are higher than they are wide, giving the
  diagram a vertical orientation.


>>Bitmap Icon
----------- 
  Select this option to print icons exactly as they
  appear on the screen (that is, as bitmaps). Note
  that bitmap icons do not scale well. If you turn
  this option off, icons are drawn so that they can
  be scaled well. Drawn icons are not identical to
  the icons as they appear on the screen.


>>Encapsulated Postscript
----------------------- 
  Select this option to format the diagram so that it
  can be included in a document. A diagram in
  encapsulated PostScript prints on a single page.
  
  Leave this option unselected to format the diagram
  so that it can span multiple pages if necessary.
  The resulting diagram can only be printed by
  itself; it cannot be included in a document.
  
  The setting of this option affects how Insight uses
  the minimum and maximum scale values that you
  specify (see the description of the Scale option
  below).


>>Erase Behind Labels
------------------- 
  Select this option to improve the readability of
  icon labels by leaving extra white space behind
  them.


>>Include Description
------------------- 
  Select this option to include the diagram
  description in the print able diagram. The diagram
  description consists of the diagram's name, an
  Environment naming expression that identifies its
  contents, the username and date associated with the
  creation of the printable diagram file, and the
  diagram's caption (if it has one).
  

>>Scale
----- 
  Adjust the two scale bars to set the minimum and
  maximum scale (in per cent of screen size) to be
  used in the printable diagram. A scale value of 100
  prints icons about 1 inch high. The dialog box does
  not allow you to set the minimum to be greater than
  the maximum.

  Insight chooses a scale value between the specified
  minimum and maximum that results in the largest
  icons possible on the fewest pages:

  * When the Encapsulated Postscript option is turned
    off, Insight first uses the minimum value to
    calculate the minimum number of pages on which the
    diagram will fit. The printable diagram is then
    formatted with the largest scale between the mini-
    mum and maximum that still allows the diagram to
    fit on the minimum number of pages.

  * When the Encapsulated Postscript option is
    selected, Insight formats the printable diagram
    using the largest scale between the minimum and
    maximum that allows the diagram to fit on a single
    page. Insight will not choose a smaller scale than
    the specified minimum, even if the diagram
    overflows the page. When the diagram is included in
    a document, further scaling may be performed using
    the scaling capability of the tool you are using to
    produce the document.


>>Paper Size
---------- 
  Select the option corresponding to the desired
  standard paper size, or select Custom to specify
  nonstandard measurements:

  * A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, and A5 define standard paper
    sizes used in Europe. A4 is the paper size closest
    to U.S. letter-sized paper.

  * Us_Letter and Us_Legal define standard paper
    sizes used in the United States.

  * Custom allows you to specify measurements in the
    Width and Height text-entry boxes. Measurements are
    expressed in the units specified by the selected
    Units option.

  Note that when you select the option for a standard
  paper size, the paper's measurements are displayed
  as nonmodifiable text in the Width and Height entry
  boxes. The labels of these boxes are grayed out
  when they are nonmodifiable.


>>Margins
-------
  Specifies the margins of the printable diagram.
  Margins are the amount of white space between the
  diagram content and an edge of the page. Margin
  measurements are expressed in the units specified
  by the selected Units option.


>>Units
----- 
  Select the option corresponding to the unit of
  measurement (inches, centimeters, points, or picas)
  you want to use for specifying paper size and
  margins.


>>Icon Labels
----------- 
  Enter the font and size to be used for characters
  in icon labels and in the body text of the diagram
  description (if you have selected Include
  Description). You can specify any font that is
  available on your printer. You must type the font
  name exactly as your printer expects it (that is,
  with the correct case and punctuation).


>>Description Labels
------------------
  Enter the font and size to be used for labels in
  the diagram description (if you have selected
  Include Description). You can specify any font that
  is available on your printer. You must type the
  font name exactly as your printer expects it (that
  is, with the correct case and punctuation).


>>Caption
-------
  Enter the font and size to be used for characters
  in the diagram's caption, if it has one. You can
  specify any font that is available on your printer.
  You must type the font name exactly as your printer
  expects it (that is, with the correct case and
  punctuation).


>>Page Numbers
------------
  Enter the font and size to be used for page
  numbers. Page numbers are included only if a
  diagram spans multiple pages. They appear outside
  the cut border printed on the page. You can specify
  any font that is available on your printer. You
  must type the font name exactly as your printer
  expects it (that is, with the correct case and
  punctuation).


>>OK
-- 
  Click OK to preserve your print option settings
  until you log out from the Environment. These
  settings are updated each time you click OK.

  
>>Cancel
------ 
  Click Cancel to revert the print option settings to
  they way they were the last time you clicked OK.



>>SEE ALSO
--------

Insight User's Manual
  package Insight_Batch
  menu command File:Print 


#Tools RDF Menu            
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>PDL Definition
--------------
  Displays in a window the high-level component,
  file, or document in which the information is
  defined.


>>PDL Enclosing
-------------
  Displays in a window the enclosing Design Facility
  high-level component. (Note that this is not the
  enclosing library structure of the enclosing Ada
  unit). Before executing this command, the cursor
  must point to a @COMPONENT_KIND annotation.
        
  The following table illustrates the relationships
  of the enclosing high-level component:

  Cursor Location           Enclosing Design Component
  ---------------           --------------------------      

  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    There is no enclosing com-
  annotation of the         ponent; the RDF will dis-
  System hierarchical       play a message indicating 
  component.                that.

  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The package specification
  annotation of the         for the System hierarchi-
  Segment hierarchical      cal component from which
  component.                the Segment was allocated.

  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The package specification
  annotation of the CSCI    for the Segment (or System
  hierarchical component.   if there is no Segment) 
                            hierarchical component 
                            from which the CSCI was
                            allocated.

  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The package specification 
  annotation of the HWCI    for the Segment (or System
  hierarchical component.   if there is no Segment) 
                            hierarchical component
                            from which the HWCI was 
                            allocated.
                                     
  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The specification for the 
  annotation of the CSC     CSCI or CSC hierarchical 
  hierarchical component.   component from which the 
                            CSC was allocated.
        
  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The specification for the 
  annotation of the         CSC or sublevel CSC com-
  sublevel CSC hierar-      poenent from which the 
  chical component.         sublevel CSC component 
                            was allocated.
        
  On the @COMPONENT_KIND    The specification for the
  annotation of the CSU     CSC or sublevel CSC com-
  hierarchical component.   ponent from which the CSU 
                            was allocated.       


>>PDL Show Usage  
--------------
  Displays all allocations and satisfactions of a
  requirement. Before executing this command, the
  cursor must point to an @REQUIREMENT annotation.


>>PDL Explain
-----------
  Displays information about the structure or
  annotation on which the cursor is located.
        
  In a preview document, this command displays
  information about the document structure on which
  the cursor is located.
        
  In PDL, this command displays information about the
  annotation (and its argument) on which the cursor
  is located.


>>PDL Complete
------------
  Inserts required annotations for the current
  lifecycle phase into the design element image.
  

>>PDL Complete (Annotate)
-----------------------
  Inserts required and optional annotations for the
  current lifecycle phase into the design element
  image.
  

>>Target Key/Phase...
-------------------
  Allows you to set the target key and phase for the
  specified view.
  

>>Generate Document...
--------------------
  Allows you to generate abstract documents, generate
  markup, and print documents.
        
  There are three independent activities that can be
  initiated from this menu. You can:
        
  * Generate/update the document database (create and
    abstract document).

  * Create Interleaf or Compose markup.

  * Print
         

>>Display Hierarchy...
--------------------
  Displays the 2167A static hierarchy of the
  specified component.
  

>>Check Consistency...
--------------------
  Verifies that the specified high-level component
  (System, Segment, HWCI, or CSCI) is structurally
  and hierarchically consistent with the Design
  Facility requirements.
  

>>Component Hierarchy...
----------------------
  Allows you to change the children of a Rational
  system.
   

>>New 2167A Component...
----------------------
  Creates and initializes a high-level component of
  the specified kind (System, Segment,
  Multi_Subsystem_CSCI, Single_Subsystem_CSCI, or
  CSCI_Child_Sybsystem). The following operations are
  performed during creation and initialization:
        
  * Creation of the CMVC system object types as
  described in the table below.
          
  * Building of the appropriate library structure for
    the design target.
          
  * Possible creation of an empty high-level
    component (see the table below).
          
  * Setting of the design target for the subsystem to
    the design target of model specified in the Model
    entry box.
          
  * Setting of the lifecycle phase to
    Requirements_Analysis.
        
  * Setting of the appropriate parental relationship
    as specified by the Parent Component entry box.
          

#RDF Target Key and Design Phase
  Tools:RDF:Target Key/Phase sets the target key and
  phase for the specified view.

 

#RDF Generate Document
  Tools:RDF:Generate Document allows you to generate
  abstract documents, generate markup, and print
  documents.
        
  There are three independent activities that can be
  initiated from this menu. You can:
        
  * Build Database: Generates/updates the document
    database (creates and abstracts document).

  * Generate_Markup: Creates Interleaf or Compose
    markup.

  * Print: Prints the specified pages of the document
    to the selected printer with the specified printer
    options.

  If you select all three checkboxes, the RDF will
  first build the document database, then generate
  markup based on the new database, and finally print
  the new document according to the print options you
  supply (pages, "Other Options", and "Selected
  Printer").

  The "Print" command uses Compose markup to generate
  the postscript. If you select the "Print" checkbox
  without also selecting the "Generate_Markup"
  checkbox and choosing "Compose" format, then the
  old markup will be used (regardless of whether you
  select the "Build_Database" checkbox).
        
  If you select the "Generate_Markup" checkbox
  without also selecting the "Build_Database"
  checkbox, the old document database will be used.

#RDF Display Hierarchy
  Tools:RDF:Display Hierarchy shows the 2167A static
  hierarchy of the specified component.
  
  
>>OPTIONS
-------
        
>>Component
---------
  Enter the name of component for which to display
  the 2167A static hierarchy.


>>Compose CSCIs
---------------
  Check this option if you want any high-level
  component specified in the @DECOMPOSITION
  annotation of any CSCIs in the specified hierarchy
  to be included in the display. If this option is
  not chosen, the static structure is shown only to
  the CSCI level.
        

>>Transitive
----------
   Check this option if you want the transitive
   closure of the specified component to be included
   in the display. If this option is not chosen, only
   the immediate children of the specified component
   are shown.


#RDF Check Consistency
  Tools:RDF:Check Consistency verifies that the
  specified high-level component is structurally and
  hierarchically consistent with the Design Facility
  requirements.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Component
---------
  Enter the name of the high-level component (System,
  Segment, HWCI, or CSCI) to be checked.
  

>>Attempt Repair
--------------       
  Check this box if you want any inconsistencies
  detected to be corrected, to the extent possible.
  
#RDF Component Hierarchy
  Tools:RDF:Component Hierarchy allows you to change
  the children of a Rational system.
        

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>System or Subsystem
-------------------
  Enter the name of the system or subsystem for which
  the children are to be changed. 
        

>>Current Children
----------------
  Lists the current children of the specified system
  or subsystem.
  

>>Remove Children
---------------
  Lists the children that are to be removed from the
  specified system or subsystem. To indicate the
  children that are to be removed, select the
  unwanted children from the top Current Children
  list and click on the arrow that points to the
  Remove Children list. 
        

>>Add Children
------------
  Lists the children that are to be added to the
  specified system or subsystem. To indicate the
  children that are to be added, select the desired
  children from the bottom Current Children list and
  click on the arrow that points to the Add Children
  list.
  

>>OK
--       
  Executes the changes, making them take effect.
        

>>Filter
------
  Regenerates the list of Current Children. To
  abandon the current system and change the children
  of a different system, type in the name of the new
  system in the System or Subsystem text entry box
  and click on the Filter button.
              

>>Cancel
------
  Cancels the command without changing any children.
  

#RDF New 2167A Component
  Tools:RDF:New 2167A Components creates and
  initializes a high-level component of the specified
  kind (System, Segment, Multi_Subsystem_CSCI,
  Single_Subsystem_CSCI, or CSCI_Child_Sybsystem).
  The following operations are performed during
  creation and initialization:
        
  * Creation of the CMVC system object types as
    described in the table below.
          
  * Building of the appropriate library structure for
    the design target.
          
  * Possible creation of an empty high-level
    component (see the table below).
          
  * Setting of the design target for the subsystem to
    the design target of model specified in the Model
    entry box.
          
  * Setting of the lifecycle phase to
    Requirements_Analysis.
        
  * Setting of the appropriate parental relationship
    as specified by the Parent Component entry box.
          
  The following tables shows what objects are created
  when each type of high-level component is
  initialized.
  
                            |                         |
>>  ---------------------------------------------------
  | 2167A Hierarchical      |  CMVC Object Created  |
  | Component Kind          |                       |
  |-------------------------------------------------|
  | System                  | Rational System       |
  | Segment                 | Rational System       |
  | Multi_Subsystem_CSCI    | Rational System       |
  | Single_Subsystem_CSCI   | Rational Subsystem    |
  | CSCI_Child_Subsystem    | Rational Subsystem    |
  ---------------------------------------------------
  

>>  ---------------------------------------------------
  | 2167A Hierarchical      |  2167A Hierarchical   |
  | Component Kind          |  Component Created    |
  |-------------------------------------------------|
  | System                  | System package spec   |
  | Segment                 | Segment package spec  |
  | Multi_Subsystem_CSCI    | None                  |
  | Single_Subsystem_CSCI   | CSCI package spec     |
  | CSCI_Child_Subsystem    | CSCI package spec     |
  ---------------------------------------------------


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Name
----
  Enter the name of the high-level component to be
  created. The name must be an Ada simple name.
        

>>Initial View Name        
-----------------
  Enter the base name for the working view of the
  subsystem/system created. For example,
  "Rev1_Working" might be the name of the working
  view and "Ssr1_0_1", "Ssr1_0_2", and "Pdr1_0_1" all
  might be names of released views.


>>Component Kind
--------------
  Choose the kind of high-level component to be
  created: system, segment, multi-subsystem CSCI,
  single-subsystem CSCI, or CSCI child subsystem.
  

>>Model
-----
  Enter which model to use when the subsystem/system
  is created. The default model,
  !Model.Rational_2167a_R1000, has a set of links
  identical to !Model.R1000_Portable, so that code
  can be run on machines other than R1000s.
  !Model.Rational_2167a_R1000 has a design target
  RATIONAL_2167A_R1000 registered with it and the
  lifecycle phase library switch is set to
  Requirements_Analysis. Finally, the model contains
  the library structure required by the Design
  Facility -- namely, the Documentation, Files and
  Graphics directories.
  

>>Parent Component
----------------
  Enter the name of the previously initialized parent
  high-level component that is to be linked. Leaving
  this empty specifies that the component has no
  parent. The parental relationships can later be
  changed with the Tools:RDF:Component Hierarchy
  command.
  

>>Comments
--------
  Enter comments to be put into the CMVC
  configuration database on creations of the
  subsystem/system.


#Tools RPI Menu
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI menu.

#RPI Put Changes
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:RPI Put
  Changes dialog box.

#RPI Accept Changes
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:RPI Accept
  Changes dialog box.

#RPI Show Out Of Date
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Show Out of
  Date dialog box.
  
#Tools RPI Create Menu
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Create menu.

#RPI Create Gateways from Document Database
  Help not available for the
  Tools:RPI:Create:Gateways from Document Database
  dialog box.

#RPI Create View Gateway
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Create:View
  Gateway dialog box.

#RPI Create File Gateway 
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Create:File
  Gateway dialog box.

#RPI Create Graphic Gateway  
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Create:Graphic
  Gateway dialog box.

#RPI Connect
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:RPI Connect
  dialog box.

#RPI Disconnect
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:RPI Disconnect
  dialog box. 

#RPI Save Archive
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Save Archive
  dialog box.

#RPI Restore Archive
  Help not available for the Tools:RPI:Restore
  Archive dialog box.

#Tools RTI Menu
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI menu.

#RTI Import Model
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Import Model
  dialog box.

#RTI Accept Changes
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:RTI Accept
  Changes dialog box.

#RTI Prepare Document
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Prepare
  Document dialog box.

#RTI Baseline Model
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Baseline Model
  dialog box.

#RTI Increment Model
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Increment
  Model dialog box.

#RTI Destroy Model
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Destroy Model
  dialog box.

#RTI Options
  Help not available for the Tools:RTI:Options dialog
  box.


#Tools Macro Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Begin Macro Def
---------------
  Begins a macro definition. 
  
  A macro is a sequence of Environment keystrokes
  that can be bound to and invoked with a single
  keystroke or key combination. All keystrokes
  pressed after this command is executed and before
  the End Macro Def command is executed are part of
  the macro.
  
  The Begin Macro Def command also can be executed by
  pressing [Meta][[].


>>End Macro Def
-------------
  Ends a macro definition.

  The End Macro Def command also can be executed by
  pressing [Meta][]].


>>Execute Macro
-------------
  Executes the current macro. 

  The Environment allows only one unbound keyboard
  macro definition at a time. This macro is sometimes
  referred to as the current macro and can be
  executed using this command or by pressing
  [Meta][X]. A new definition replaces an existing
  definition. However, macros can be bound to other
  keys or key combinations using the Bind Macro to
  Key command.
  

>>Bind Macro to Key
-----------------                                                   
  Binds the current macro to a key or key combination
  and assigns it a number. When prompted in the
  message window for the key to which to bind the
  current macro, simply press that key or key
  combination.

  Each macro that has been bound has a number. This
  number is displayed when the Bind Macro to Key
  command is executed. This number is also displayed
  when the Execute Macro command is used to execute
  macros. The current macro is number 0.

  Note that the binding created by this command, by
  default, lasts only until you log out. To save
  macros so that they are available the next time you
  log in, use the Macro.Save command.

  For more information, see package Editor.Macro in
  the Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.


#Tools Operator Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------
      

>>Backup...
---------
  Saves the current Environment state to a tape.
  Regular backups ensure that you can restore the
  Environment with minimal loss after a catastrophic
  system or Environment failure. The Backup command
  copies the entire Environment onto tape. It allows
  you to make either of two kinds of backups: full or
  incremental. Full and incremental backups are
  described in the online help for the Backup dialog
  box.


>>Verify Backup...
----------------
  Reads a backup tape and performs a series of checks
  to verify that the backup is complete and
  recoverable. The command mimics the backup recovery
  procedure, reading all appropriate data, but does
  not actually restore the data. Verify Backup is
  appropriate for any Environment backup, full or 
  incremental, on either 9-track or 8mm tapes.
  

>>Backup History
--------------
  Displays history for the ten most recent full and
  incremental backups.


>>Create/Edit User...
------------------- 
  Allows you to create a new user account, modify the
  characteristics of an existing user account
  (including changing the associated password or the
  access-control groups to which the user belongs),
  or delete an existing user account. Operations on
  user accounts other than your own require operator
  capability.


>>Create/Edit Group...
--------------------
  Allows you to:
  
  * Create a new access-control group
  
  * Modify an existing access-control group by adding
    and/or removing usernames
  
  * Delete an existing access-control group

  An access-control group is a list of usernames.
  Each object in the Environment is associated with a
  list of groups that are permitted access to that
  object. (This list is the object's access-control
  list.) Only users who belong to one of the groups
  listed in an object's access-control list are
  permitted access to that object.
  
  Note that you must have operator capability to
  execute this command.


>>Force Logoff...
---------------
  Terminates the Environment user session active on
  the specified line (port). Note that to log off a
  session other than your own, you must have operator
  capability.


>>Report Generation...
--------------------
  Creates a report on system availability, usage,
  devices, daemons, outages, and/or trouble. The
  report is based on the information contained in the
  system error logs. The kind of information reported
  is determined by the Report option menu.


>>Shutdown System...
------------------
  Shuts down the system on the specified date and
  time. When the system is shut down, users are
  logged off, all terminal lines are disabled, and a
  snapshot is taken to preserve the Environment
  state.

  Note that you must have operator capability to
  execute this command.


>>Cancel Shutdown...
------------------
  Cancels a system shutdown initiated by the Shutdown
  System command. This command can be entered at any
  time during the interval before the actual shutdown
  takes place. When this command is executed,
  messages are sent to users that shutdown is
  canceled.

  Note that you must have operator capability to
  execute this command.


#Backup
  Tools:Operator:Backup saves the current Environment
  state to a tape. Regular backups ensure that you
  can restore the Environment with minimal loss after
  a catastrophic system or Environment failure.
  
  The Backup command copies the entire Environment
  onto tape. You can make either of two kinds of
  backups: full or incremental. Full and incremental
  backups are described in the OPTIONS section below.

  Regardless of the kind of backup created, the
  Backup command writes two kinds of information onto
  the tape:
  
  * Backup Index, which records the system structure

  
  * Data, which is all information contained in the
    Environment
  
  If you take backups on a 9-track tape drive, the
  backup index is written on a separate tape (also
  called a blue tape in previous Environment
  releases). If you take backups on an 8-millimeter
  tape drive, the backup index is written immediately
  following the data on the last data-tape cartridge.
  
  The Backup command can initiate a backup
  immediately or after some specified amount of time,
  but it cannot perform any system adjustments before
  or after the backup. Therefore, system managers
  often create and/or use commands such as the
  !Commands.Abbreviations.Do_Backup command, which
  are implemented using the !Commands.System_Backup-
  .Backup_Generic procedure.
 
  Note that execution of the Backup command requires
  that you have operator capability.

  Note also that backups and disk collection cannot
  be run at the same time. If you have begun a backup
  and disk collection needs to begin, the backup will
  be terminated by default. To change this default,
  use the !Tools.Disk_Daemon.Set_Backup_Killing
  (False) procedure, which causes the last data tape
  to be written before disk collection can begin. If
  the disk daemon is running and a backup is
  attempted, disk collection must complete before the
  backup can begin.

  For further information, see your System Manager's
  Guide.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Starting Time
-------------
  Enter the date and time at which the backup is to
  begin. The default is the current date and time.


>>Full
----
  Choose this radio button to save the complete
  Environment, including all user data and system
  information.
    
  You must make a full backup if you are making the
  first backup after the system has been recovered
  from backup tapes. The default is to take a full
  backup. If full is chosen, Incremental cannot be
  chosen simultaneously.


>>Incremental
-----------
  Choose this radio button to save any changes since
  the last full backup.
  
  You cannot make an incremental backup if you are
  making the first backup on a system that has been
  recovered from backup tapes. The default is not to
  take an incremental backup. If incremental is
  chosen, Full cannot be chosen simultaneously.

  Multiple incremental backups can be based on a
  single full backup; however, only one of these
  incremental backups can be restored with the full
  backup.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Manager's Guide

System Management Utilities (SMU) book 
  package System_Backup
  procedure System_Backup.Backup
  procedure System_Backup.Backup_Generic

#Verify Backup
  Tools:Operator:Verify Backup reads a backup tape
  and performs a series of checks to verify that the
  backup is complete and recoverable. The command
  mimics the backup recovery procedure, reading all
  appropriate data, but does not actually restore
  the data.

  Verify Backup is appropriate for any Environment
  backup, full or incremental, on either 9-track or
  8mm tapes. Tapes should be loaded in the following
  order: Backup Index (Blue) tape first, then data
  tapes in sequence. You should mount the first tape
  immediately. The Verify Backup command then pauses
  until the time specified in the Wait Until box.
  Tape mount requests are generated on the operator
  console.

  For more information about system backups, see your
  System Manager's Guide.
       

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Wait Until
----------
  Enter the amount of time that Verify Backup is to
  wait before starting to read the backup tape and
  perform validity checks. The default is to start
  immediately.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Manager's Guide
  procedure 
    System_Maintenance'Spec_View.Units.Verify_Backup


#Create/Edit User
  Tools:Operator:Create/Edit User allows you to:
  
  * Create a new user account
  
  * Modify the characteristics of an existing user
    account, including changing the associated
    password or the access-control groups to which
    the user belongs
  
  * Delete an existing user account 
  
  The following sections describe each of these
  operations. They are followed by an OPTIONS
  section describing each of the elements in the
  Create/Edit User dialog box.

  Note that to create a new user account, to modify a
  user account other than your own, or to delete a
  user account, you must have operator capability.
  
  For more information about managing user accounts,
  see your System Manager's Guide or package Operator
  in the System Management Utilities (SMU) book of
  the Environment Reference Manual.


>>Creating a New User Account
---------------------------
  To create a new user account:
  
  1. Choose the Create New User radio button. Access
     responds by greying out the Old Password and
     Remove From Group entry boxes, indicating that
     they are not applicable.
  
  2. In the User entry box, enter the username for
     the new user account. (See OPTIONS for legal
     values.)
     
 
  3. In the New Password entry box, enter the initial
     password to be associated with the specified
     username. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
    
     The first time the user logs in, he or she
     should use Tools:Operator:Create/Edit User to
     change his or her password.
  
  4. In the Add to Group entry box, enter the name of
     the access-control group(s) to which the user-
     name is to belong.
     
     Even if no access-control groups are explicitly
     entered, a group with the same name as the
     username is created and the new user is added to
     this group. Thus, each user has his or her own
     group with at least that user as a member.
     
     The new user is also added to groups Public and
     Network_Public, unless some other groups are
     entered in the Add to Group entry box.
     
  5. If the user is to receive electronic mail
     through the Rational Environment, choose Create
     Mailbox.

  6. Click OK.

  The command creates:
  
  * A home library for the user, with the name
    !Users.User, where User is the username you
    entered in the User entry box. Links from
    !Model.R1000 are copied into the new user's home
    world.
  
  * A default session, S_1, for the user.
  
  * An entry for the user in !Machine.Users in which
    the system stores vital user account information.


>>Modifying an Existing User Account
----------------------------------
  To modify the characteristics of an existing user
  account:
  
  1. Choose the Modify Existing User radio button.
     Access responds by ungreying any elements that
     may have been greyed out.
     
  2. In the User entry box, enter the username
     associated with the account to be modified. (See
     OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
  3. If you are changing the password associated with
     the username:
     
     a. In the New Password entry box, enter the new
        password. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
     b. In the Old Password entry box, enter the
        password currently associated with the user-
        name. If the old password has been forgotten,
        the Operator's password can be used in its
        place.
        
     If the user has encrypted entries in a
     remote-passwords, be aware that these entries
     will have to be re-encrypted (using the
     !Commands.Remote_Passwords.Update command) after
     the user's password is changed.

  4. If you are adding the username to one or more
     access-control groups, enter the names of those
     groups in the Add to Group entry box. (See
     OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
     Note that identities are established at login.
     Adding a user to a group will not be effective
     until the user's next login.
     
  5. If you are removing the username from one or
     more access-control groups, enter the names of
     those groups in the Remove from Group entry box.
     (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
     Note that identities are established at login.
     Removing a user from a group will not be
     effective until the user's next login.

  6. Click OK.
  
  Note that you cannot use this command to create a
  mailbox for an existing user. To create a mailbox,
  use File:New:Mailbox.
  

>>Deleting a User Account
-----------------------
  To delete a user account:
  
  1. Ensure that the user is logged out. You cannot
     delete the account of a user that is currently
     logged in.

  2. Choose the Delete User radio button. Access
     responds by greying out all the entry boxes
     except the User entry box, indicating that they
     are not applicable.
     
  3. In the User entry box, enter the username to be
     deleted. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)

  4. Click OK.

  The command deletes the user's default session,
  S_1, and the entry in !Machine.Users for the user;
  thus, the user is not permitted to log in. The
  user's home library and it's contents, however, are
  preserved. To delete the user's home library, use
  File:Delete File.

  Note that the user Operator cannot be deleted using
  this command.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>User
----
  Enter the username for the account to be created,
  modified, or deleted:
  
  * If you are creating a new user account, the name
    must be a legal Ada simple name and must be
    unique.
    
  * If you are modifying existing user accounts, you
    can specify multiple usernames using wildcards,
    set notation, and indirect files.

    When an indirect file containing a list of
    usernames is specified, the usernames listed in
    the indirect file are automatically resolved to
    their proper context. This means that a system
    manager does not have to specify the fully
    qualified pathname of each entry in the file.

  * If you are deleting a user account, the name must
    be unique.


>>New Password
------------
  If you are creating a new user account or if you
  are modifying an existing user account and want to
  change the user's password, enter the new password
  to be associated with the User.

  The password can be any arbitrary string. This
  password is subject to the minimum password length
  set by the current password policy, if one has been
  set (see the !Commands-
  .Operator.Set_Password_Policy command). The default
  is the null string--in other words, no password.
  This element is greyed out if you are deleting a
  user account.


>>Old Password
------------
  If you are modifying an existing user account and
  want to change the user's password, enter the
  password currently associated with the User.

  If you do not know the old password, then the
  password for the username Operator can be used. The
  default is the null string--in other words, no
  password. This element is greyed out if you are
  creating a new user account.
  
  Note that if the old password has expired because
  of the current password policy, it can still be
  specified.
  

>>Add to Group
------------
  If you are creating a new user account, enter the
  names of the access-control group(s) to which the
  User is to belong. Even if no access-control
  groups are explicitly entered, a group with the
  same name as the username is created and the new
  user is added to this group. Thus, each user has
  his or her own group with at least that user as a
  member. The new user is also added to groups Public
  and Network_Public unless some other groups are
  entered in this entry box.
  
  If you are modifying an existing user and want to
  add the user to one or more additional
  access-control groups, enter the names of those
  groups. Multiple groups can be specified using
  wildcards, set notation, and indirect files.

  The specified group names must exist before this
  command is executed.


>>Remove from Group
-----------------
  If you are modifying an existing user and want to
  remove the user from one or more access-control
  groups, enter the names of those groups. Multiple
  groups can be specified using wildcards, set
  notation, and indirect files.
  
  The specified group names must exist before this
  command is executed.


>>Create Mailbox
--------------
  If you are creating a new user account and that
  user is to receive electronic mail through the
  Rational Environment, choose this box. The command
  creates a mailbox named Main in which the user can
  receive mail. The mailbox is created in the
  specified user's home library in a directory called
  Mailbox. If the directory does not exist, it is
  created.

  You cannot use this command to create a mailbox for
  an existing user. To create a mailbox, see
  File:New:Mailbox.


>>Create New User
---------------
  Choose this radio button if you want to create a
  new user account. You cannot choose Create New
  User, Modify Existing User, and Delete User
  simultaneously.
  

>>Modify Existing User
--------------------
  Choose this radio button if you want to modify an
  existing user account. You cannot choose Create New
  User, Modify Existing User, and Delete User
  simultaneously.


>>Delete User
-----------
  Choose this radio button if you want to delete an
  existing user account. You cannot choose Create New
  User, Modify Existing User, and Delete User
  simultaneously.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Network Mail User's Guide 
  procedure Mail.Create

System Management Utilities (SMU) book
  package Operator
  procedure Operator.Add_To_Group
  procedure Operator.Change_Password
  procedure Operator.Create_User    
  procedure Operator.Delete_User    
  procedure Operator.Remove_From_Group
  

#Create/Edit Group
  Tools:Operator:Create/Edit Group allows you to:
  
  * Create a new access-control group
  
  * Modify an existing access-control group by adding
    and/or removing usernames
  
  * Delete an existing access-control group

  The following sections describe access-control
  groups and each of these operations. They are
  followed by an OPTIONS section describing each of
  the elements in the Create/Edit Group dialog box.

  Note that you must have operator capability to
  execute this command.
  
  For more information about access-control groups,
  see package Operator in the System Management
  Utilities (SMU) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual.


>>Access-Control Groups
---------------------
  An access-control group is a list of usernames.
  Each object in the Environment is associated with a
  list of groups that are permitted access to that
  object. (This list is the object's access-control
  list.) Only users who belong to one of the groups
  listed in an object's access-control list are
  permitted access to that object.  

  Groups are defined either automatically by the
  Environment (such as groups Public and
  Network_Public) or explicitly using the Create/Edit
  Group command. Group objects are stored in the
  !Machine.Groups world.
  
  For more information on assigning access to groups,
  see the introduction to package Access_List in the
  Library Management (LM) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.


>>Creating a New Group
--------------------
  To create a new access-control group:

  1. Choose the Create Group radio button. Access
     responds by greying out the Remove Users entry box,
     indicating that it is not applicable.
     
  2. In the Group entry box, enter the name of the
     new access-control group. The group cannot already
     exist. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
  
  3. In the Add Users entry box, enter the name(s) of
     the users that are to belong to the new group. If
     this entry box is empty, no users are added. (See
     OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
  4. Click OK.
  
  A maximum of 1,000 group names is allowed per
  system. Once this maximum has been reached, no
  further group names can be added. An error message
  is issued if this command is executed after the
  system has reached the maximum allowable number of
  groups. Once the limit has been reached,
  access-list compaction must be run before you can
  create new groups (even if you have removed
  unneeded groups). See the introduction to package
  Daemon in the System Management Utilities (SMU)
  book for further information on access-list
  compaction.


>>Deleting a Group
----------------
  To delete an existing access-control group:

  1. Choose the Delete Group radio button. Access
     responds by greying out the Add Users and Remove
     Users entry boxes, indicating that they are not
     applicable.
     
  2. In the Group entry box, enter the name of the
    access-control group to be deleted. The group must
    already exist. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
  
  3. Click OK.

  ACL entries that refer to a deleted group are
  reclaimed during the next access-list compaction.
  See package Daemon in the System Management
  Utilities (SMU) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual for further information on access-list
  compaction.


>>Modifying a Group
-----------------
  To modify an existing access-control group:

  1. Choose the Modify Group radio button. 
     
  2. In the Group entry box, enter the name of the
     access-control group to modify. The group must
     already exist. (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
  
  3. In the Add Users entry box, enter the name(s) of
     the users that are to be added to the group. If
     this entry box is empty, no users are added. (See
     OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
  4. In the Remove Users entry box, enter the name(s)
     of the users that are to be removed from the group.
     If this entry box is empty, no users are removed.
     (See OPTIONS for legal values.)
     
  5. Click OK.
  
  To see if the username is already a member of a
  particular group, you can use the
  Operator.Display_Group command.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Group
-----
  Enter the name(s) of the access-control group(s) to
  be modified. Multiple groups can be specified using
  wildcards, set notation, and indirect files. If you
  are deleting or modifying a group, that group name
  must already exist.


>>Add Users
---------
  Enter the username(s) that are to added to the
  specified group(s).

  Multiple names can be specified using wildcards,
  set notation, and indirect files. When an indirect
  file containing a list of usernames is specified,
  the usernames listed in the indirect file are
  automatically resolved to their proper context.
  This means that you do not have to specify the
  fully qualified pathname of each entry in the file.

  The usernames must exist before this command is
  executed. Note that groups can contain only
  usernames -- not other groups.


>>Remove Users
------------
  Enter the username(s) that are to be removed from
  the specified group(s).

  Multiple names can be specified using wildcards,
  set notation, and indirect files. When an indirect
  file containing a list of usernames is specified,
  the usernames listed in the indirect file are
  automatically resolved to their proper context.
  This means that you do not have to specify the
  fully qualified pathname of each entry in the file.

  The usernames must exist before this command is
  executed.
  

>>Action
------
  Choose the operation to be performed on the
  specified group(s):

  * Create Group: Creates a new access-control group,
    with the usernames specified in the Add Users entry
    box as members. When this radio button is chosen,
    the Remove Users entry box is not applicable.

  * Delete Group: Deletes an existing access-control
    group. When this radio button is chosen, the Add
    Users and Remove Users entry boxes are not
    applicable.
  
  * Modify Group: Changes the members of an existing
    access-control group. Usernames entered in the Add
    Users entry box are made members of the specified
    group, and users in the Remove Users entry box are
    removed from membership.
  
  Note that identities are established at login.
  Adding or removing a user from a group will not be
  effective until the user's next login.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Management Utilities (SMU) book
  package Operator
  procedure Operator.Add_To_Group
  procedure Operator.Create_Group    
  procedure Operator.Delete_Group    
  procedure Operator.Remove_From_Group


#Force Logoff
  Tools:Operator:Force Logoff terminates the
  Environment user session active on the specified
  line (port).

  Uncommitted changes to images are saved if the
  Commit Buffers box is checked. The user's
  background jobs (if any) continue to run, and any
  foreground jobs that do not require interactive
  input are put in the background. Foreground jobs
  that attempt interactive input are killed.

  To log off a session other than your own, you must
  have operator capability.
  

>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Physical Line
-------------
  Enter the line (port) number through which the user
  is logged in. If the user is logged into more than
  one Environment session, make sure that you enter
  the line number for the session to be logged out.
  
  To display a list of the users that are currently
  logged in and the lines through which they are
  logged in, use the Tools:System Info:Users command.


>>Commit Buffers
-------------
  Check this box to ensure that uncommitted changes
  that the user has made to any images will be
  committed before the user is logged out. If this
  box is not checked and the user has uncommitted
  changes, those changes are lost.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Management Utilities (SMU) book of the Environ-
ment Reference Manual
  procedure Operator.Force_Logoff


#Report Generation
  Tools:Operator:Report Generation creates a report
  on system usage, problems, and daemons. The report
  is based on the information contained in the system
  error logs. The kind of information reported is
  determined by the Report option menu.
  
  For more information about generating system
  reports, see your System Manager's Guide.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Report
------
  From this option menu, choose the kind of report
  you want to generate:
  
  * Everything: Generates a report for all the
    available kinds of information.
    
  * Availability: Generates a report including the
    uptime and downtime of the system by classes.
    
  * Usage: Generates a report of the number of users
    logged into the system, at hourly intervals.
    
  * Devices: Generates a report of errors from
    devices such as disks, memory, and tape.
    
  * Daemons: Generates a report of the daemon sizes,
    and schedules.
    
  * Outages: Generates a report of system outages,
    including the reasons and explanations for the
    outages.
    
  * Trouble: Generates a report of potential trouble
    areas, based on all the information collected in
    the logs.
  
  * Advice: Not described because the reports
    generated are either incomplete or not applicable.

  * Tape_Mounts: Not described because the reports
    generated are either incomplete or not applicable.


>>Start Time
----------
  Enter the day and time of the least recent error
  log to be included in the report.
  
  The day should be in the format mn/dy/yr, and the
  time should be in military format. For example, to
  generate a report beginning at 10 A.M. on May 8,
  1992, use the value "05/08/92 10:00". To generate a
  report beginning at 10 P.M. that day, use the
  value "05/08/92 22:00".

  If you do not specify a day and time in this entry
  box, the command generates a report beginning with
  the earliest day and time for which information is
  available.
 

>>End Time
--------
  Enter the day and time of the most recent error log
  to be included in the report.
  
  The day should be in the format mn/dy/yr, and the
  time should be in military format. For example, to
  generate a report ending at 10 A.M. on August 16,
  1992, use the value "08/16/92 10:00". To generate a
  report ending at 10 P.M. that day, use the value
  "08/16/92 22:00".
  
  If you do not specify a day and time in this entry
  box, the command generates a report up to the
  latest day and time available.


>>Log Directory
-------------
  Enter the name of the library that contains the log
  files from which the report will be generated.
  Unless you have moved your log files to another
  library, you do not need to change this value from
  it's default value, !Machine.Error_Logs.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Manager's Guide


#Shutdown System
  Tools:Operator:Shutdown shuts down the system on
  the specified date and time.

  The Shutdown System command issues several warnings
  to users. The first warning occurs when the command
  is executed, the next occurs after 3/4 of the
  interval has passed, the next occurs when 3/4 of
  the remaining time has passed, and so on, until the
  system is shut down. Note that a warning interval
  of 30 seconds or less results in immediate
  shutdown.

  When the system is shut down, users are logged off,
  all terminal lines are disabled, and a snapshot is
  taken to preserve the Environment state.


>>OPTIONS
-------

>>Time
----
  Enter the date and time at which the system is to
  shut down. The time should be of the form shown in
  this example:
    November 11, 1992 at 12:33:25 AM


>>Reason
------
  From this option menu, choose a reason for shutting
  down the system:
 
  * Cops indicates a customer operation
  
  * Release indicates the loading of a new release

  * Maint indicates scheduled maintenance

  * Crash indicates that the system crashed

  * Hang indicates that the system was hung

  * Other indicates any other reason

  The cause is entered into the machine's error log.
  

>>Explanation
-----------
  Enter an explanation to be entered into the
  system's error log. Your explanation can include
  other relevant information, such as the Environment
  state at the time of shutdown. The default, "No
  reason given", should be replaced.


>>RESTRICTIONS
------------    

  Execution of this command requires that you have
  operator capability.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

System Manager's Guide

System Management Utilities (SMU) book of the
Environment Reference Manual
  procedure Operator.Shutdown


#Tools Files Info Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Name/Version
------------
  Displays the fully qualified name of the object in
  the current image. This command also displays the
  current version number of the object.
  
  Environment objects such as Ada units and files can
  have multiple versions. In particular, a new
  version is created when:

  * An Ada unit in the source state is opened for
    editing

  * An Ada unit in the installed or coded state is
    incrementally edited

  * A text file is committed or promoted

  Versions are numbered starting with 1, which
  represents the oldest version (the object at
  creation). In the display produced by this command,
  the object's version number is displayed in the 'V
  attribute after the name. For example, if 12 was
  the current version of a file called Library_Rdf,
  it would be displayed as Library_Rdf'V(12).
  
  Note that versions are different from CMVC
  generations. For more information about versions,
  see package Library in the Library Management (LM)
  book of the Environment Reference Manual.


>>Locks
-----
  Displays the locks that exist on the object in the
  current image.

  The Environment places a lock on an object when a
  job or user is accessing the object. This command
  displays the locks that exist on the specified
  object. You may want to use this command to check
  for the locks on an object if:

  * An Io.Open command raises the
    Io_Exceptions.Use_Error error (lock error)

  * The editor reports a lock error

  * Other operations indicate problems accessing the
    object

  The locks are identified by job identity, job
  number, and kind. "Reader" signifies that the
  indicated job or user is viewing the object but has
  not opened it for editing. "Updater" signifies
  that the indicated job or user is making changes to
  the object, such as editing or compiling it.

  Note that the editor maintains separate locks on
  the DIANA representation of an Ada unit and its
  image. Locks on the image of an Ada unit are
  indicated by the suffix "'Image" attached to the
  unit's name in the locks display.

  For more information, see the documentation for the
  What.Locks Environment command in the Session and
  Job Management (SJM) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.


#Tools System Info Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Users
-----
  Displays a list of users who are currently logged
  into the Environment. For each user session, the
  display includes:
 
  * The name of the session, in the form
    "username.session"
  
  * The port (line) number through which the user is
    logged in.
  
  * The job number for the user's editor job. You can
    think of an editor job representing the user's
    session to the Environment in terms of a job
    number.
  
  * The elapsed time since the user's editor job
    began; that is, the elapsed time since the user
    logged into that session.
    
  * The input and output (I/O) count for the session.

  The display also includes the Environment release
  number and the date and time the system was last
  rebooted.


>>Disk
----
  Displays disk data. The display includes:

  * The volume number for each disk drive
  
  * The capacity, in pages of 1 Kb each, of each disk

  * The amount of space, in pages of 1 Kb each, that
    is still available on each disk
  
  * The amount of space, in pages of 1 Kb each, that
    is already used on each disk
    
  * The percentage of space that is available on each
    disk

  * The totals for capacity, space available, space
    used, and percentage of space available for all
    disk volumes combined.

  For more information, see the documentation for the
  Operator.Disk_Space command in the System
  Management Utilities (SMU) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual.


>>Configuration
-------------
  Displays information about the system's
  configuration and load. The display includes:
  
  * The name of the system
  
  * The machine ID for the system
  
  * The number of the Environment release running on
    the system
  
  * The date of the last backup
  
  * The capacity, amount of space used, amount of
    space free, percentage of space free, and retargets
    for each disk.


>>System Load
-----------
  Displays the current system load. The display
  includes:

  * The average number of runnable tasks; that is,
    the average number of tasks eligible for CPU time.

  * The average number of tasks waiting on disk
    operations.

  * The average number of tasks that were withheld
    from running. A task is withheld from running if it
    is consuming more than its share of resources or if
    it has been queued or disabled (see the System
    Management Utilities (SMU) book, package
    Scheduler).

  For each category, the command displays the number
  of tasks averaged over one of four sampling
  intervals: the last 100 milliseconds, the last
  minute, the last five minutes, and the last fifteen
  minutes.

  For more information, see the documentation for the
  What.Load command in the Session and Job Management
  (SJM) book of the Environment Reference Manual.
  
#Help Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>Explain
-------
  Provides explanatory information regarding the
  designated item in the current window.
  
  Specifically, this command has the following
  effects:

  * Ada images: Provides an explanation of the error
    designated by the cursor position in the Ada unit
    in the current window. Used after syntactic or
    semantic errors have been discovered, the command
    displays an explanation of those errors in the
    Message window.

  * Command images: Provides an explanation of errors
    in the command in the current window. Used after
    syntactic or semantic errors have been discovered,
    the command displays an explanation of those errors
    in the Message window.
 
  * Help and job windows: Adds an entry to the Help
    window for the designated item in a Help window
    menu. This command has no effect on displays
    created by What.Jobs.

  * Library images: Changes the level of detail
    displayed for the designated object(s) in the
    library.
    
  * Links: Inserts an explanation below the current
    link that explains what units use the linked unit.
    This command is useful for determining what
    dependencies on links exist. If there already is an
    explanation explaining the link, this command
    removes that explanation.

  * Switches: Inserts, below the current switch, an
    explanation of that switch. If an explanation is
    already there, this command will remove it.

  * Xref images: Displays the full name of the
    currently designated unit in the Message window.


>>On Help...
----------
  Describes the mechanisms for obtaining online
  information. Rational Access provides online help
  and information about the Access menus,
  window-control buttons, dialog boxes, and mouse and
  key bindings. Access also supports the basic
  Environment help facilities.


>>On Getting Started...
---------------------
  Introduces the Access Window and describes how to
  choose entries from menus and use special features
  in Access.


>>On Key
------
  Allows you to find what command is bound to a
  specified key or key combination, and displays help
  for the command from the Environment Reference
  Manual.
  

>>On Key Bindings...
------------------
  Lists the Access key bindings and their functions.


>>On Function Keys...
-------------------
  Lists the function keys and item-operation keys and
  the commands they are bound to.


>>On Mouse...
-----------
  Lists the mouse bindings and their functions.


>>On Window Panel...
------------------
  Allows you to get help for the window-control
  buttons, located under the menu bar.


>>On Menu=>
---------
  Displays help for the menu you select.


>>On Environment...
-----------------
  Provides an interface to the Environment's online
  help and to Access Help available locally.


>>On Version...
-------------
  Shows the current version of Rational Access.


#On Help
  Rational Access provides online help and
  information about   the Access menus,
  window-control buttons, dialog boxes, and mouse and
  key bindings. Access also supports the basic
  Environment help facilities.

  This help entry contains information about:
  
  * The Access Help Window

  * Obtaining information about Access

  * Obtaining information about the Environment
    

>>THE ACCESS HELP WINDOW
----------------------
  Information about Access is displayed in the Access
  help window, which is a separate window managed by
  Access and your window manager. A single help
  window is associated with each Access window.

  From the Access help window, you can:
  
  * Scroll to see other sections of the help text by
    using the scroll bars on the right and bottom of
    the window.
    
  * Skip to the next section or subsection within the
    help text for the current topic by clicking on the
    down arrow button at the top of the help window.
    
  * Go back to the previous section or subsection
    within the help text for the current topic by
    clicking on the up arrow button at the top of the
    help window.
    
  Note that information about the Environment is
  displayed in an Environment help window within the
  Environment area of the Access window.


>>OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT ACCESS
----------------------------------- 

  * To obtain a description of all the items on a
    menu, you can pull down the menu and can press [F1]
    or the [Help] key to obtain information.
    Alternatively, you can choose the name of the menu
    in question from the Help:On Menu submenu.

  * To obtain information about a dialog box,
    including a description of each field, you can
    click on the Help button or press [F1] or the
    [Help] key from the dialog box in question.

  * To find out what operations are performed by the
    function keys (as delivered by Access), you can
    click on the [F?] button on the main Access window.
    Clicking on this button displays the Function Key
    Palette. The palette serves as an active set of
    buttons as well as a template. For a textual list
    of command bound to function keys, including the
    item operations that are supported, choose Help:On
    Function Keys.

  * To find out what command is bound to a particular
    key or key combination, choose Help:On Key. The
    Environment then prompts you (in the message
    window) for the key to be described. The
    description is displayed in an Environment help
    window.   
  
  * To find out about other key or mouse bindings,
    choose Help:On Key Bindings or Help:On Mouse.
    
  * To obtain a description of each of the
    window-control buttons at the top of the Access
    window, choose Help:On Window Panel. Choosing this
    menu changes the mouse pointer to a ?. Placing the
    pointer on the button in question and clicking will
    display information about that button.


>>OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ENVIRONMENT
-------------------------------------------

  * To obtain information about the current
    underlined error, choose Help:Explain or press the
    [Explain] key (generally bound to [F3]).
    
  * To obtain additional information in a library
    image or in the CMVC editor, choose Help:Explain or
    press the [Explain] key (generally bound to [F3]).
    
  * To obtain information about a specific
    Environment command, enter
    What.Does("command_name") in a command window and
    press [Promote] (generally bound to [F8]).
    
    If you are uncertain of name of the command for
    which you would like information or if you would
    like to browse through a related set of command
    names, choose Help:On Environment. On Environment
    displays a static dialog box. Choosing a topic
    area and clicking on the Filter button displays a
    list of topics in that area. Clicking OK displays
    help for the selected topic in an Environment
    help window. (See the help for the On Environment
    dialog box for more information.)
    

#Getting Started
  Rational Access is a Motif-style graphical user
  interface to the Rational Environment. Access
  allows you to perform standard Environment
  operations using such Motif conventions as a mouse,
  pull-down menus, dialog boxes, and persistent
  control panels. Access also supports existing
  Environment paradigms such as item operations and
  command windows.

  This Help on Getting Started contains:

  * Introduction to the Access Window
  * Choosing Entries from Menus
  * Special Features in Access
  * See Also


>>INTRODUCTION TO THE ACCESS WINDOW
---------------------------------

  The Access window is composed of:

  * A title bar, indicating the name of the Access
    window. You can specify the title when starting
    Access by using the -title option.
    
  * The main menu bar, home of Access's nine
    pull-down menus.
    
  * A window-control panel, containing buttons for
    controlling the size and contents of Environment
    windows and for displaying special-purpose Access
    windows, such as the Image Palette, the Function
    Key Palette, and the Debugger Palette.
    
  * A user-defined button panel, in which users may
    place buttons for commonly-used menu items. To
    create a button, hold down the [Control] key
    while using the mouse to click on the desired
    menu command. To save your buttons, choose
    Session:Screen:Save Button Panel.
    
  * The Environment area, containing one or more
    Environment windows. The Environment area is the
    same as the Environment area of other Rational
    interfaces.
    
    
>>CHOOSING ENTRIES FROM MENUS
---------------------------

  You can use either the mouse or keyboard to choose
  commands from the Access menus. To use the mouse:

  1. Put the pointer on the appropriate title in the
     menu bar and click the #1 (usually left) mouse
     button.
    
  2. Put the pointer on the name of the desired
     command and click.
     
  Alternatively, you can hold down the mouse button
  and drag on the menu instead of clicking. Menus and
  submenus are displayed as you drag on them; the
  chosen command executes when you release the mouse 
  button.
  
  To use the keyboard:

  1. Notice the underlined characters in the menu
     title. These are the "mnemonics" for the menus.
     To pull down a menu, press [Meta] and the
     mnemonic for the menu you want to view.
     
  2. Again notice the underlined characters in the
     entries. Press the letter for the entry you want
     to execute. You do not need to hold down any
     other key while pressing the mnemonic for an
     entry on a menu.
       
  Alternatively, you can press [F10] to move the
  keyboard focus to the menu bar. Once the focus in
  on the menu bar, you can use the arrow keys to
  choose a menu title. The space bar opens the
  designated menu and the [Return] key executes the
  chosen entry.


>>SPECIAL FEATURES
----------------

  Rational Access provides several features that are
  not offered in any of Rational's other interfaces:

  * Window-control buttons
  * User-defined buttons
  * Image Palette
  * Function Key Palette
  * Debug Palette
  * Just-Do-It mode
              

>>Window-Control Buttons
----------------------
  Window-control buttons are located on the main
  Access window immediately below the menu bar. They
  allow you to move within Environment images, change
  the number and size of Environment windows within
  the Access window, and bring up special-purpose
  Access windows. To find out what a particular
  button does, choose Help:On Window Panel.
  

>>User-Defined Buttons
--------------------
  The area below the window-control buttons is
  reserved for user-created buttons. You can create a
  button for any command on the Access menus.
  
  * To create a button for a menu command, hold down
    the [Control] key while clicking the left mouse
    button on the menu command.
  
  * To remove a button, hold down the [Control] key
    while clicking on the button.
  
  * To save the buttons you have created, choose
    Session: Screen:Save Button Panel.
    

>>Image Palette
-------------
  The Image Palette provides a list of Environment
  images which you can redisplay in an Environment
  window. To display an image, place the cursor on
  the image name and double click.
  
  To bring up the Image Palette, click on the
  window-control button fifth from the right. In the
  Image Palette:
  
  * The bottom panel contains a list of all images
    that have been displayed since login and that have
    not been released. (This is the same list displayed
    by the Environment command Window.Directory.)
    
  * The top panel contains a user-created list of
    images that will continue to be listed even if the
    images are released. To add an image from the
    bottom panel to the top panel, click once on the
    image name to select it and then click the Add
    button. This list persists until you log out.

  * The Refresh button refreshes the contents of the
    bottom panel, to ensure that they match the correct
    set of images. Releasing an image does not
    automatically remove its name from the Image
    Palette; thus, you will need to refresh the Image
    Palette to remove the listing.
    
  * The Search box allows you to enter part of an
    image name and locate that image in the bottom
    panel. To activate the search, click on an arrow
    button, indicating the direction in which to
    search.


>>Function Key Palette
--------------------
  The Function Key Palette is an online template for
  the Access function keys. In addition to providing
  useful information about key bindings, this
  template is active; clicking on a particular "key",
  executes that key sequence.
  
  To display the Function Key Palette, click on the
  F?  window-control button (fourth from the right).

  
>>Debugger Palette
----------------
  The Debugger Palette is a static control panel
  containing commands for using the Environment
  debugger.
  

>>Just-Do-It Mode
---------------
  Sometimes you may want to execute the same menu
  command multiple times with the same settings. In
  such a case, the dialog boxes may be unnecessary.
  Just-Do-It mode allows you to execute certain menu
  commands without seeing the dialog box; the
  settings last entered into the dialog box are
  assumed.
  
  Just-Do-It mode has been implemented for the
  following commands:
  
    File:Print
    Program:Promote to Coded
    Program:Promote to Installed
    Program:Promote to Source
    Program:Demote to Installed
    Program:Demote to Source
    Program:Demote to Archived
    CMVC:Accept Changes

  To execute the command in Just-Do-It mode, press
  the [Meta] key while clicking on the menu entry.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

  For more information about using Rational Access,
  see the Rational Access User's Guide.

  For information about a particular menu item or
  dialog box, see the online help for that menu or
  dialog box. You can get online help by opening that
  menu or dialog box and pressing the [Help] key.

  For information about X defaults and the options
  available when starting an Access window, see the
  "man" page for the command "rational" on your
  workstation.
 


#Mouse Bindings
  Below are the mouse operations available in the
  Environment area of the Access window. 
  
  This information is also found in the Rational
  Access Quick Reference.
  
  Mouse operations in menus and dialog boxes follow
  OSF/Motif standards; they are described in Appendix
  B of the Rational Access User's Guide.

>>  ---------------------------------------------------
  |     Left (#1) Button     |   Operation          |
  |--------------------------|----------------------|
  | Click                    | Position cursor      |
  | Double click             | Definition           |
  | Drag                     | Motif selection      |
  | [Shift] + click          | End Motif selection  |
  | [Shift] + double click   | Definition in place  |
  | [Control] + click        | Start Env region     |
  | [Control] + double click | Select object/parent |
  | [Control] + drag         | Env region selection |
  ---------------------------------------------------                                                   


>>  ---------------------------------------------------
  |    Middle (#2) Button    |   Operation          |
  |--------------------------|----------------------|
  | Click                    | Copy Motif selection |
  | Double click             |                      |
  | Drag                     |                      |
  | [Shift] + click          |                      |
  | [Shift] + double click   |                      |
  | [Control] + click        | Copy Env region      |
  | [Control] + double click |                      |
  | [Control] + drag         |                      |
  ---------------------------------------------------                                                   


>>  ---------------------------------------------------
  |    Right (#3) Button     |   Operation          |
  |--------------------------|----------------------|
  | Click                    |                      |
  | Double click             | Enclosing            |
  | Drag                     |                      |
  | [Shift] + click          |                      |
  | [Shift] + double click   | Enclosing in place   |
  | [Control] + click        | End Env region       |
  | [Control] + double click | Select child         |
  | [Control] + drag         |                      |
  ---------------------------------------------------                                                   

#Key Bindings
  Below are the standard Rational Access key bindings
  for:
  
  * Alphabetic Keys
  * Numeric and Symbol Keys
  * Special Keys (such as [Return])
  
  For information about function-key bindings, see
  Help:On Function Keys or the Function Key Palette.

  This information is also found in the Rational
  Access Quick Reference.


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                ALPHABETIC KEYS                   |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | Key |    [Ctrl]    |    [Meta]    | [Ctrl][Meta] |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  A  | beg of line  |              |              |
  |  B  | cursor left  | Debug menu   |              |
  |  C  | copy region  | command win  | copy line    |
  |  D  | del next char| delete word  | delete line  |
  |  E  | end of line  | Edit menu    | unlock win   |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  F  | cursor right | File menu    |              |
  |  G  | interrupt job| kill job     |              |
  |  H  | cursor left  | Help menu    |              |
  |  I  |              | Navigate menu|              |
  |  J  | cursor right | next word    |              |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  K  | del to eol   | del to eow   | kill window  |
  |  L  | repaint wins | clear wins   |              |
  |  M  | push mark    | CMVC menu    | go to mark   |
  |  N  | cursor down  | next item    | next window  |
  |  O  | open new line| Tools menu   |              |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  P  |              | Program menu | lock window  |
  |  Q  | help on key  | prompt for   |              |
  |  R  | search prev  |              | replace prev |
  |  S  | search next  | Session menu | replace next |
  |  T  | trans chars  | trans words  | trans lines  |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  U  | cursor up    | prev item    | prev window  |
  |  V  | scroll down  | scroll up    |              |
  |  W  | cut region   |              |              |
  |  X  | deselect     | execute macro|              |
  |  Y  | paste region | paste next   |              |
  |  Z  | scroll up    |              |              |
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |             NUMERIC AND SYMBOL KEYS              |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | Key |    [Ctrl]    |    [Meta]    | [Ctrl][Meta] |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |0..9 | numeric arg  |              |              |
  |  !  |              | expand image | expand window|
  |  @  | push mark    | ins RDF ann  |              |
  |  ^  |              | cap word     |              |
  |  (  | insert ("    |              |              |
  |  )  | insert ")    | elide image  | shrink window|
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |  \  | deselect     |              |              |
  |  |  | insert --|   |              |              |
  |-or_ | numeric neg  | prev undline |              |
  |=or+ | insert =>    | next undline | bind macro   |
  |  [  | start region | start macro  |              |
  |  ]  | end region   | end macro    |              |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  |;or: | insert :=    |              |              |
  |'or" | quote char   |              |              |
  |,or< | shrink window| lwrcase word | prev hist/cmd|
  |.or> | expand window| uprcase word | next hist/cmd|
  |/or? | window dir   | explain      |              |
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |              SPECIAL KEYS - PART 1               |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  |  Key   |    Unmod    |   [Shift]   |  [Control]  |
  |--------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
  | Return | return      | return      | commit      |
  | Tab    | tab         | tab         |             |
  | Delete | del prv char| del region  | del to eol  |
  | Up     | cursor up   | scroll up   | select prev |
  | Down   | cursor down | scroll down | select next |
  | Left   | cursor left | scroll left | select prnt |
  | Right  | cursor right| scroll right| select child|
  | Home   | beg of line | beg of image| line info   |
  | End    | end of line | end of image| end input   |
  | Page Up| scroll up   | beg of image|             |
  | Page Dn| scroll down | end of image|             |
  ----------------------------------------------------
  

>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |              SPECIAL KEYS - PART 2               |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  |  Key   |   [Meta]    |     [Control][Meta]       |
  |--------|-------------|---------------------------|
  | Return | debug       |                           |
  | Tab    |             |                           |
  | Delete | del prv word| delete white space *      |
  | Up     | prev item   | previous window           |
  | Down   | next item   | next window               |
  | Left   | prev word   | enclosing in place        |
  | Right  | next word   | definition in place (body)|
  | Home   |             | top of window             |
  | End    |             | bottom of window          |
  | Page Up|             |                           |
  | Page Dn|             |                           |
  ----------------------------------------------------
   * CAUTION: This kills the window manager on an
              IBM RS/6000 workstation.
              


#Function Keys
  Below are descriptions of the standard Rational
  Access function key bindings, including the item
  operation combinations.
  
  This information is also found in the Rational
  Access Quick Reference. Active buttons for the
  function keys are available in the Function Key
  Palette (press the F? button on the top of the
  Access window).


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 FUNCTION KEYS                    |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | Key |  Unmodified  |   [Shift]    |   [Control]  |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  | F1  | help         | prompt for   | object       |        
  | F2  | open         | edit         | region       |        
  | F3  | explain      | undlines off | window       |        
  | F4  | check out    | check in     | image        |
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  | F5  | definition   | def in place | line         |        
  | F6  | command win  | complete     | word         |        
  | F7  | enclosing    | encl in place| mark         |        
  | F8  | promote      | demote       |              |        
  |-----|--------------|--------------|--------------|
  | F9  | format       | semanticize  |              |        
  | F10 | menu bar     | home library |              |        
  | F11 | create text  | create Ada   |              |        
  | F12 | next item    | prev item    |              |        
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 OBJECT OPERATIONS                |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F1] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | select first child         |                    
  |          b          | select first child         |                    
  |          c          | copy object                |                    
  |          d          | delete object              |                    
  |          e          | select last child          |
  |          g          | abandon object             |                    
  |          h          | select object/parent       |                    
  |          i          | insert object              |                    
  |          j          | select child               |                    
  |          k          | delete object              |                    
  |          m          | move object                |                    
  |          n          | select next                |                    
  |          r          | redo                       |                    
  |          s          | sort object                |                    
  |          u          | undo                       |                    
  |          v          | redo                       |                    
  |          x          | release object             |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       1 or !        | expand object              |                    
  |       . or >        | elide object               |                    
  |       / or ?        | explain                    |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |         Tab         | tab to comment             |                    
  |       Return        | commit object              |                    
  |         Up          | select previous            |                    
  |        Down         | select next                |                    
  |        Left         | select object/parent       |                    
  |        Right        | select child               |
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 REGION OPERATIONS                |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F2] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | beginning of region        |                    
  |          b          | beginning of region        |                    
  |          c          | copy region                |                    
  |          d          | delete region              |                    
  |          e          | end of region              |                    
  |          f          | fill region                |                    
  |          h          | previous region on stack   |                    
  |          j          | next region on stack       |                    
  |          k          | delete region              |                    
  |          m          | move region                |                    
  |          n          | push region onto stack     |                    
  |          p          | copy top region onto stack |                    
  |          q          | justify region             |                    
  |          r          | move bottom region to top  |                    
  |          t          | exchange top two regions   |
  |          u          | paste region               |                    
  |          x          | deselect region            |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       6 or ^        | capitalize region          |                    
  |       9 or (        | start region               |                    
  |       0 or )        | finish region              |                    
  |       - or _        | make region into comment   |                    
  |       = or +        | uncomment region           |                    
  |       [ or {        | start region               |                    
  |       ] or }        | finish region              |                    
  |       ' or "        | capitalize region          |                    
  |       , or <        | lowercase region           |                    
  |       . or >        | uppercase region           |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       Delete        | remove region from stack   |                    
  |         Up          | paste region               |                    
  |        Down         | push region onto stack     |                    
  |        Left         | paste previous region      |                    
  |        Right        | paste next region          |
  |        Home         | beginning of region        |                    
  |         End         | end of region              |                    
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 WINDOW OPERATIONS                |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F3] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | beginning of window        |                    
  |          b          | beginning of window        |                    
  |          c          | copy window                |                    
  |          d          | remove window              |                    
  |          e          | end of window              |                    
  |          f          | format windows             |                    
  |          h          | enclosing                  |                    
  |          j          | join next window           |                    
  |          k          | remove window              |                    
  |          m          | promote/lock window        |                    
  |          n          | next window                |                    
  |          o          | join next window           |                    
  |          t          | transpose windows          |
  |          u          | previous window            |                    
  |          v          | child window               |                    
  |          w          | remove window              |                    
  |          x          | remove window              |                    
  |          y          | demote/unlock window       |                    
  |          z          | promote/lock window        |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       1 or !        | expand window              |                    
  |       . or >        | shrink window              |                    
  |       / or ?        | window directory           |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       Delete        | join previous window       |                    
  |       Return        | promote/lock window        |                    
  |         Up          | previous window            |                    
  |        Down         | next window                |                    
  |        Left         | parent window              |                    
  |        Right        | child window               |
  |        Home         | beginning of window        |                    
  |         End         | end of window              |                    
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                  IMAGE OPERATIONS                |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F4] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | beginning of image         |                    
  |          b          | beginning of image         |                    
  |          e          | end of image               |                    
  |          f          | fill mode on               |                    
  |          h          | scroll left                |                    
  |          i          | insert mode                |                    
  |          j          | scroll right               |                    
  |          n          | scroll down                |                    
  |          o          | overwrite mode             |                    
  |          u          | scroll up                  |                    
  |          x          | fill mode off              |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |         Up          | scroll up                  |                    
  |        Down         | scroll down                |                    
  |        Left         | scroll left                |                    
  |        Right        | scroll right               |
  |        Home         | beginning of image         |                    
  |         End         | end of iamge               |                    
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 LINE OPERATIONS                  |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F5] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | beginning of line          |                    
  |          b          | beginning of line          |                    
  |          c          | copy line                  |                    
  |          d          | delete line                |                    
  |          e          | end of line                |                    
  |          i          | insert line                |                    
  |          j          | join lines                 |                    
  |          k          | delete to end-of-line      |                    
  |          o          | open new line              |                    
  |          t          | transpose lines            |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       4 or $        | center line                |                    
  |       6 or ^        | capitalize line            |                    
  |       , or <        | lowercase line             |                    
  |       . or >        | uppercase line             |                    
  |       / or ?        | line information           |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       Delete        | delete to end-of-line      |                    
  |         Up          | previous line              |                    
  |        Down         | next line                  |                    
  |        Home         | beginning of line          |                    
  |         End         | end of line                |                    
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 WORD OPERATIONS                  |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F6] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | beginning of word          |                    
  |          b          | beginning of word          |                    
  |          c          | copy word                  |                    
  |          d          | delete word                |                    
  |          e          | end of word                |                    
  |          i          | speller learn word         |                    
  |          j          | next word                  |                    
  |          k          | delete to end-of-word      |                    
  |          m          | speller check image        |                    
  |          n          | speller explain next       |                    
  |          r          | speller learn replacement  |                    
  |          t          | transpose words            |
  |          w          | speller window             |                    
  |          x          | speller exchange word      |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       6 or ^        | capitalize word            |                    
  |       , or <        | lowercase word             |                    
  |       . or >        | uppercase word             |                    
  |       / or ?        | speller check text         |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       Delete        | delete to end-of-word      |                    
  |        Down         | speller explain next       |                    
  |        Left         | previous word              |                    
  |        Right        | next word                  |
  |        Home         | beginning of word          |                    
  |         End         | end of word                |                    
  ----------------------------------------------------


>>  ----------------------------------------------------
  |                 MARK OPERATIONS                  |
  |--------------------------------------------------|
  | [Control][F7] + Key |         Operation          |
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |          a          | start macro                |                    
  |          b          | start macro                |                    
  |          e          | finish macro               |                    
  |          f          | bind macro to key          |                    
  |          h          | previous mark              |                    
  |          j          | next mark                  |                    
  |          m          | execute macro              |                    
  |          n          | push mark                  |                    
  |          p          | copy top mark              |                    
  |          r          | rotate top marks           |                    
  |          t          | swap marks                 |
  |          u          | top mark                   |                    
  |          x          | execute macro              |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       9 or (        | start macro                |                    
  |       0 or )        | finish macro               |                    
  |       [ or {        | start macro                |                    
  |       ] or }        | finish macro               |                    
  |---------------------|----------------------------|
  |       Delete        | delete mark                |                    
  |       Return        | execute macro              |                    
  |         Up          | top mark                   |                    
  |        Down         | push mark                  |                    
  |        Left         | previous mark              |                    
  |        Right        | next mark                  |
  ----------------------------------------------------

                

#Window Control Button Panel
  Transforms the pointer into a question mark which
  you can click on a window-control button and get
  help on the button.  

  For help on a specific button, position the
  question-mark pointer over the button and click.
  (The window-control buttons are located directly
  under the menus.)

  To change the pointer back to its original state,
  close this box or click in an Environment window.

  From left to right, the window-control buttons are:

  Scroll Up
  Scroll Down
  Scroll Left 
  Scroll Right
  Top of Image 
  Bottom of Image 
  Copy Window 
  Join Previous Window 
  Join Next Window 
  Expand Window 
  Shrink Window 
  Realign Windows 
  Lock Window 
  Unlock Window 
  Show Image Palette 
  Show Function Key Palette 
  Show Debugger Palette 
  Remove Window
  Fully Expand Window 


#Rational Environment Help
  Through the Access help facility, you can obtain
  information on Environment commands and packages.
  (Environment commands are Ada subprograms that you
  usually execute through command windows.) You can
  also obtain information on Rational Access topics.
  
  The Rational Environment Help box allows you to
  generate a list of help topics from which you can
  select a specific command or item of interest and
  display help for that command or item.
  
  If you are not sure of the exact name of the
  command or item of interest you want help for, you
  can progressively narrow down the filtered list of
  topics until you find the topic you want, or you
  can generate a large list and scroll through it
  manually using the slider and search arrows (see
  "Searching for a Specific Topic," below).
  
  For example, if you want to get Environment help on
  copying a library but are not sure of the exact
  Environment command name, you can use the following
  options to find the desired command (which happens
  to be !Commands.Library.Copy).
                          

>>GETTING A LIST OF TOPICS
------------------------

  Click the Topic option menu to choose the topic
  area that contains the command or item for which
  you want help:
  
  * To generate a list of all available help topics,
    choose All_Topics.
    
  * To generate a list of all Access-specific topics,
    choose #Rational Access.
    
  * To choose an area of Environment operations,
    choose the name of that area. The areas correspond
    to the books of the Rational Environment
    Reference Manual and other Rational documenents:
  
      Reference Summary
      Editing Images
      Editing Specific Types   
      Debugging 
      Session and Job Management   
      Library Management
      Text Input/Output
      Data and Device Input/Output     
      String Tools 
      Programming Tools         
      System Management Utilities 
      Project Management
      Mail                  
      Network Tools 
      Design Facility      
  
  Returning to our example, if you're looking for
  information about copying an object, you might
  choose Library Management. Clicking on this topic
  causes it to appear as the label for the option
  menu.
                 

>>FILTERING A LIST
----------------     

  Click the Filter button to generate a list of
  commands in the Filtered Topics field for the
  specified topic. The first command in the list is
  highlighted.
  
  If you chose the Library Management help topic, for
  example, a list of all the commands and packages in
  the Library Management (LM) book of the Environment
  Reference Manual appears in the Filtered Topics
  field.
  
  To filter a list that displays only commands that
  match a designated pattern, enter a string to
  search for in the Pattern entry box, using
  pattern-matching wildcards, if desired (see below).
  Then click the Filter button.
  
  For example, replace the @ sign with the word
  "copy" to filter a list with only topics that have
  the word "copy" in them. Click the Filter button to
  generate the new list. It appears with the
  
  You can use the following pattern-matching
  wildcards in the Pattern box.
   
    ?   Matches any character.

    %   Matches any character that is a legal Ada
        identifier.

    {   Matches the beginning of a line when used at
        the beginning of a pattern.

    }   Matches the end of a line when used at the end
        of a pattern.

    []  Defines a set of characters, of which any
        one can be matched. For example [xyz] or
        [x-z]. 
               
    \   Quotes the next wildcard character, causing
        it to have a literal, not wildcard,
        interpretation.
            
    *   Matches zero or more occurrences of the 
        previous character or set of characters.
        
    @   Is a synonym for "?*". This matches zero or 
        more occurrences of anything. 
            
  Note that if nothing is in the Pattern entry box,
  no list will be filtered. To list all subtopics
  within the specified topic, enter the @ sign.
                   

>>SEARCHING FOR A SPECIFIC TOPIC
------------------------------

  To find the topic you want help for, you can scroll
  the filtered list manually by dragging the slider
  (the slider only appears if the list is longer than
  the Filtered Topics field).
  
  You can also scroll through the list stopping only
  at a specific command or at commands that match a
  designated pattern. Enter a specific command name
  or name fragment in the Search Pattern entry box.
  You may use pattern-matching wildcards, if desired
  (see above).
  
  For example, if you did not know that information
  about copying libraries is located in the Library
  Management category and you chose All Topics
  instead, you could quickly search through the long
  list:
 
  1. Enter the word "copy" in the Search Pattern
     entry box.
  
  2. Click the search arrow on the right to scroll
     down in the list, or the one on the left to
     scroll up in the list.
       
  3. Repeat step 2 to go to the next occurrence.
    
  The location cursor (highlighted box) will stop
  only at commands with the word "copy" in them. Note
  that an empty search pattern matches nothing.
  

>>DISPLAYING HELP
--------------- 

  To display help for the specified topic in the
  Selected Topic box:
  
  1. Select the topic with the location cursor by
     clicking on it. The name of the topic appears in
     the Selected Topic entry box. You may also type
     directly into the Selected Topic entry box.
  
  2. Click OK. The Environment help window displays
     help for Environment topics, and the Access help
     window displays help for Access topics
     (designated by a # sign before the topic).  
  
  For example, if you have filtered a list from the
  Library Management topic and specified "copy" in
  the Pattern box, or if you filtered a list for all
  topics and scrolled through the list, you will
  notice that there is an entry for
  !Commands.Library.Copy. Select it and click the OK
  button to display help for copying a library.

  
>>CLOSING THE ENVIRONMENT HELP DIALOG BOX
---------------------------------------

  Click the Remove Window button in the upper-right
  corner of the dialog box. (The button looks like
  four arrows pointing inwards.)


#Help on Menu
------------------------------------------------------
Legend:
  ... Indicates that the item brings up a dialog box. 
      You can obtain additional information by
      clicking on the Help button in the dialog box.
      
  =>  Indicates that the item brings up a submenu. You
      can obtain additional information by displaying
      the submenu and pressing the [Help] key
      (generally bound to [F1]).

  _   Indicates the letter used to represent the item
      from the keyboard. [Meta] + underlined letter
      displays the corresponding menu. When a menu is
      displayed, typing a letter activates the
      corresponding item on that menu.
------------------------------------------------------


>>File Menu Help
--------------
  Provides help for creating, manipulating, saving,
  and maintaining files.
 

>>Edit Menu Help
--------------
  Provides help for editing files, including
  searching for and replacing text strings, changing
  case, cutting and pasting text, and using the
  spelling checker.


>>Navigate Menu Help
------------------
  Provides help for traversing within images and
  between Environment windows.


>>Program Menu Help
-----------------
  Provides help for manipulating and maintaining Ada
  units.


>>CMVC Menu Help
--------------
  Provides help for Configuration Management and
  Version Control of Rational subsystems.


>>Debug Menu Help
---------------
  Provides help for debugging Ada programs using the
  Rational Debugger.


>>Session Menu Help
-----------------
  Provides help for customizing your current
  Environment session.


>>Tools Menu Help
---------------
  Provides help for Rational layered products.


>>Help Menu Help
--------------
  Provides help for obtaining information from the
  online help and information available through
  Rational Access and the Environment.
  

#Rational Access Version
  Help:On Version displays the current version of 
  Rational Access. The display includes, in this
  order:
  
  * The release (rev) number and date of the Access X
    client software running on the workstation.
    
  * The release (rev) number of the Access server
    running on the R1000.
    
  * The version of the keymap located on the R1000 
    in !Machine.Editor_Data.Rational_Access_Commands.
  
  When you are done reading the Rational Access
  Version dialog box, click OK.
  


#On Compatibility
  The Help on Version dialog box indicates that there
  is a compatibility problem among the three main
  Access components:
  
  * The Access X client running on the workstation.
  
  * The Access server running on the R1000.
  
  * The Rational_Access_Commands keymap procedure in 
    !Machine.Editor_Data on the R1000.

  If the box indicates that your problem is with the
  keymap, you should click OK and continue logging
  in. Note, however, that certain keyboard and mouse
  operations may not work as expected until you
  obtain the proper keymap.
  
  If the box indicates that your problem is with the
  Access server on the R1000, alert your system
  manager. Continue logging in at your own risk.
  
#Scroll Up Button
  Moves your view of the current image up. There will
  be overlap between what is currently visible and
  what is visible after the operation. The operation
  never moves the first line of the image lower than
  the first line of the window.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Image.Up
  
#Scroll Down Button
  Moves your view of the current image down. There
  will be overlap between what is currently visible
  and what is visible after the operation. The
  operation may move the last line of the image out
  of your view; you can scroll down into the white
  space below the last character in the file.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
    procedure Editor.Image.Down

#Scroll Left Button
  Moves your view of the current image to the left,
  if the left margin is not already visible.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Image.Left  
  
#Scroll Right Button
  Moves your view of the current image to the right.
 

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Image.Right

#Top of Image Button
  Moves the Environment cursor to the top line of the
  current image, subsequently moving your view to
  encompass that area of the image.
        
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  Editor.Image.Beginning_Of
  
#Bottom of Image Button
  Moves the Environment cursor to the bottom of the
  current image, subsequently moving your view to
  encompass that area of the image.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Image.End_Of

#Copy Window Button
  Divides the current Environment window into two
  windows with identical images. Each image can be
  scrolled independently. Making changes to one of
  these images affects both of them.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Copy

#Join Next Window Button
  Expands the current Environment window to the size
  of the current window frame plus the window frame
  below, replacing any window that might have been in
  that frame. Unless the window is locked, the window
  frame returns to its normal size automatically when
  the next object is viewed.
  
  If your current window is at the bottom of the
  Environment area, pressing this button will expand
  the window over the window directly above.
 

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Join

#Join Previous Window Button
  Expands the current Environment window to the size
  of the current window frame plus the window frame
  above, replacing any window that might have been in
  that frame. Unless the window is locked, the window
  frame returns to its normal size automatically when
  the next object is viewed.
  
  If your current window is at the top of the
  Environment area, pressing this button will expand
  the window over the window directly below.  
                           

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Join 

#Expand Window Button
  Expands the current Environment window by four
  lines (thereby shrinking the neighboring
  Environment window by four lines).
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------
Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Expand

#Shrink Window Button
  Shrinks the current Environment window by four
  lines (thereby expanding the neighboring
  Environment window by four lines).
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Rational Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Expand

#Realign Windows Button
  Makes all visible major Environment windows the
  same size.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Focus

#Lock Window Button
  Makes the current Environment window unable to be
  replaced unless you explicitly remove or unlock it.
  An "at" sign (@) appears in the window banner,
  signifying that the window is locked.
   

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Promote

#Unlock Window Button
  Makes the current Environment window able to
  replaced without you explicitly removing it. The
  "at" sign (@) disappears from the window banner,
  signifying that the window is unlocked.

                                 
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Demote

#Show Image Palette Button
  Displays the Image Palette, a control palette that
  provides an updatable listing of the images open
  under your current Environment session.

#Show Function Key Palette Button
  Displays the Function Key Palette, an active online
  set of function "keys" from which you can perform
  any of the operations bound to Access function
  keys, including item-operation combinations.

  
#Show Debugger Palette Button
  Displays the Debugger Palette, a control palette
  that allows you to debug Ada programs.
  
#Remove Window Button
  Removes a window temporarily from the Environment
  area. The image contained in the window remains
  listed in the Image Palette and Environment Window
  Directory.   
 

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Delete
  
#Fully Expand Window Button
  Makes the current window fill the entire
  Environment area, encompassing all window frames.
   

>>SEE ALSO
--------
  
Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  procedure Editor.Window.Join
  
  
#Button Panel
  Depending on which menu commands you use often, you
  may want to create your own user-defined buttons.
  These buttons allow you to execute a menu command
  by clicking on the button.
  
  The user-defined buttons are displayed as the name
  of the command enclosed in a rectangular border,
  and appear directly below the window-control
  buttons and above the sash. You may create as many
  buttons as you wish, making space for them by
  pulling down the sash in the Environment area. The
  buttons appear left to right, in the order that you
  create them. Buttons can be saved and deleted
  between logins, and are user-specific, not
  session-specific.
  
  
>>Creating A User-Defined Button
------------------------------
  Place the pointer on a menu command and
  [Control]+click.


>>Activating A User-Defined Button
--------------------------------
  Place the pointer on the button and click.
  
  
>>Deleting A User-Defined Button
------------------------------
  Place the pointer on the button and
  [Control]+click.

  
>>Saving User-Defined Buttons
---------------------------
  Choose the Session:Screen:Save Button Panel menu
  command. The current button configuration will
  reappear when you log in again to Access.
  
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
    Chapter 14, "Customizing Your Workspace"
    
    
#Function Key Palette
  The Function Key Palette brings up a list of the
  commands that are bound to each function key and
  allows you to execute a function key command by
  clicking on its entry in the palette.
  
  The top seven [Control] buttons on the palette
  support the item-operation paradigm used in other
  Rational user interfaces. Clicking on one of these
  buttons brings up a second-level control palette
  with item-specific operations buttons.
  
  To execute a function key command, click the
  command on the palette.
  
  To close the Function Key Palette, click its Remove
  Window button. (This is located in the top, right
  corner of the palette and looks like four arrows
  pointing inwards.)
                               
    
#Object Operations
  Object operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Object]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  Object operations include those operations that can
  be performed on entire Environment objects,
  including libraries, text files, and Ada units.
  For example, object operations allow you to copy,
  move, and delete objects. Object operations also
  allow you to make selections based on the underlying
  type-specific structures of the objects.
  
  From the Object Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Object operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F1] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Object operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Object
  operations are found on the File menu.
  

>>Expand (Object-!)
-----------------
  Increases the level of detail displayed in the
  image for the currently designated item.  
   

>>Elide (Object->)
----------------
  Reduces the level of detail displayed in the image
  for the currently designated item.
                       

>>Explain (Object-?)
------------------
  Provides explanatory information regarding the
  designated item in the current window.

  
>>Copy (Object-C)
---------------
  Copies the selected item to the position of the
  Environment cursor.


>>Move (Object-M)
---------------
  Moves the selected item to the position of the
  Environment cursor.
  
  
>>Delete (Object-D)
-----------------
  Deletes the designated item.


>>Release (Object-X)
------------------
  Ends editing on the current image and makes changes
  permanent.

  This operation releases any locks the Rational
  Editor may have in the object being edited,
  destroys the window, and removes the image from the
  Image Palette and the Environment Window Directory.
    

>>Parent (Object-H)
-----------------
  Selects the parent of the designated item.
  
  The parent is the item at the next higher level.


>>Child (Object-J)
-----------------
  Selects the child of the designated item.
  
  The child is the item at the next lower level, in a
  syntactic sense, from the current item. The child
  that encloses the cursor is selected unless no such
  child exists.


>>Last Child (Object-E)
---------------------
  Selects the last child of the designated item.
  
  The last child is the last one of the set of items
  at the next lower level, in a syntactic sense, from
  the current item.
  

>>Abandon (Object-G)
------------------
  Abandons editing of the current image and does not
  save changes.

  This operation abandons any changes made to the
  image in the current window since the last commit,
  releases any locks held by the Rational Editor on
  the object corresponding to the image, destroys the
  window, and removes the image from the Image
  Palette and the Environment Window Directory.
  

>>Insert (Object-I)
-----------------
  Insert a new item.
  

>>Next (Object-N)
---------------
  Selects the next item.
  
  The next item is the item at the same level, in a
  syntactic sense, as the designated item that
  appears immediately after the designated item.
  

>>Previous (Object-Up Arrow)
--------------------------
  Selects the previous item.
  
  The previous item is the item at the same level, in
  a syntactic sense, as the designated item that
  appears immediately before the designated item.
  

>>Redo (Object-R)
---------------
  Redoes the changes previously made to an image.

  The Rational Editor maintains histories of the
  temporary copies of some image types as images of
  these types are changed. These histories allow
  changes to be undone, going back in time through
  each set of changes to the beginning of time for
  the image. Change histories can be stepped forward
  or backward with the Redo and Undo commands,
  respectively.
  
  Change histories are retained by the Rational
  Editor, depending on the type of image. These
  histories are destroyed or restarted when the
  session ends and at other times, depending on the
  type of image being edited.
  

>>Undo (Object-U)
---------------  
  Undoes the previous sets of changes to the current
  image.
  
  The Rational Editor maintains histories of the
  temporary copies of some image types as images of
  these types are changed. These histories allow
  changes to be undone, going back in time through
  each set of changes to the beginning of time for
  the image. Change histories can be stepped forward
  or backward with the Redo and Undo commands,
  respectively.
  
  Change histories are retained by the Rational
  Editor, depending on the type of image. These
  histories are destroyed or restarted when the
  session ends and at other times, depending on the
  type of image being edited.
  

>>Tab To Comment (Object-Tab)
--------------------------
  Moves the cursor to the first character of the text
  in the comment, if there is a comment on the
  current line.
 
  If there is no comment on the line and no text
  currently located at the comment column (set by the
  Comment_Column library switch), this command
  inserts the comment characters (-- ) and leaves the
  cursor at the first character position for the
  comment. Otherwise, if there is text at the comment
  column, the command moves the cursor to the
  beginning of the text, inserts the comment
  characters (-- ), and leaves the cursor after the
  inserted characters.
  

>>Sort Image (Object-S)
---------------------
  Sorts the display by increasing values.
  

>>Commit (Object-Return)
----------------------
  Makes permanent any changes made to the image in
  the current window.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the Environment
Reference Manual
  package Common.Object
  


#Region Operations
  Region operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Region]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  Region operations allow you to make and manipulate
  Environment selections. To make a selection with the
  Region operations, indicate the beginning with the
  Start command, and then move the cursor to the end
  and indicate it with the Finish command. The
  Rational Editor highlights the selection in a
  different font. It highlights only one selection at
  a time. You can use the Off and On commands to
  unselect and reselect a selection.
  
  The locations of selections of text can be stored
  in the hold stack. See below for hold stack
  operations.

  From the Region Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Region operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F2] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Region operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Region
  operations are found on the Edit menu.

  
>>Beginning (Region-B)
--------------------
  Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current
  selection,
  

>>End (Region-E)
--------------
  Moves the cursor to the end of the current
  selection.
  

>>Capitalize (Region-6)
---------------------
  Capitalizes the first letter in each of the words
  in the selection.  
  

>>Start (Region-[)
----------------
  Marks the start of a selection.
  

>>Finish (Region-])
-----------------
  Marks the endpoint of a selection and highlights
  the selection.
  

>>Comment (Region- -)
-------------------
  Puts comment characters (--) and a blank space
  before the leftmost character of each line in the
  current selection. If a line is already commented in
  that selection, additional comment characters are
  inserted in front of it.
  

>>Uncomment (Region-+)
--------------------
  Removes comment characters (-- ) from lines in which
  they are the leftmost three nonblank characters.
  This command does not remove comments from the end
  of lines containing Ada code.
  

>>Lowercase (Region-<)
--------------------
  Converts all characters in the selection to
  lowercase.
  

>>Uppercase (Region->)
--------------------
  Converts all characters in the selection to
  uppercase.
  

>>Copy (Region-C)
---------------
  Copies the current selection to the cursor location.
  The selection and the cursor can be in different
  windows.


>>Move (Region-M)
---------------
  Deletes the current selection and copies it to the
  location of the Environment cursor.
  

>>Delete (Region-D)
-----------------
  Deletes the current selection and pushes it onto
  the hold stack.
  

>>Fill (Region-F)
---------------
  Adjusts the placement of all words in the selection
  to fill completely the column between the left edge
  of the image and defined right margin. The right
  margin is set by a session switch, but this can be
  overridden for a single image using Edit:Typing
  Modes and adjusting the Fill Column value.
   
  The Fill command puts as many words as possible on
  a line, but it leaves a ragged right margin.
  
  By default, the Fill command does not compress
  extra spaces after the period (.), exclamation mark
  (!), and question mark (?) when filling an image.
  However, this default can be changed by modifying
  the Image_Fill_Extra_Space session switch. (See
  "Session Switches" in the Session and Job
  Management book (SJM) of the Environment Reference
  Manual for more information on session switches.)

  Also by default, the Fill command indents
  subsequent lines to the indent level of the first
  line of the region. However, this default can be
  changed by modifying the Image_Fill_Indent session
  switch. A value of -1 for this switch (the default)
  specifies that the indentation of the first line of
  the region should be used for subsequent lines.
  Values greater than or equal to 0 indent the region
  the number of spaces that is the value of the
  switch.
  

>>Justify (Region-Q)
------------------
  Adjusts the placement of all words in the selection
  to justify the selection flush left between the
  left edge of the image and the defined right
  margin. The right margin is set by a session
  switch, but this can be overridden for a single
  image using Edit:Typing Modes and adjusting the
  Fill Column value.

  The Justify command puts as many words as possible
  on a line and inserts spaces so that the right
  margin is even.

  By default, the Justify command does not compress
  extra spaces after the period (.), exclamation mark
  (!), and question mark (?) when filling an image.
  However, this default can be changed by modifying
  the Image_Fill_Extra_Space session switch. (See
  "Session Switches" in the Session and Job
  Management book (SJM) of the Environment Reference
  Manual for more information on session switches.)

  Also by default, the Justify command indents
  subsequent lines to the indent level of the first
  line of the region. However, this default can be
  changed by modifying the Image_Fill_Indent session
  switch. A value of -1 for this switch (the default)
  specifies that the indentation of the first line of
  the region should be used for subsequent lines.
  Values greater than or equal to 0 indent the region
  the number of spaces that is the value of the
  switch.  
                            

>>Off (Region-X)
--------------
  Unselects the current selection. The Environment
  cursor and the selection may be in different
  windows.
  
  
>>HOLD STACK OPERATIONS
---------------------
  
  Package Hold_Stack provides a mechanism for
  recovering deletions. The Rational Editor saves the
  100 most recent deletions (larger that a single
  character) in the hold stack. Deleted selections of
  any size are also saved. Items in the stack can be
  retrieved and inserted at the cursor with Top,
  Next, or Previous commands.
  
  An item retrieved from the hold stack is displayed
  and treated as a selection.


>>Delete Top (Region-Delete)
--------------------------
  Removes the top item from the hold stack. The item
  next to the top of the hold stack becomes the top
  item of the hold stack.
  

>>Push (Region-N)
---------------
  Pushes the current selection onto the hold stack.
                                      

>>Previous (Region-H)
-------------------
  Retrieves the previous item from the hold stack and
  copies it at the current cursor location. At the top
  of the stack, this command wraps to the bottom.
  

>>Top (Region-U)
--------------
  Retrieves the top item in the hold stack, leaving
  that item on the hold stack. The retrieved item is
  copied at the current Environment cursor location.
                                       

>>Copy Top (Region-P)
-------------------
  Copies the top item of the hold stack onto the top
  of the hold stack. The result is that there are two
  copies of the same item on top of the hold stack.
  

>>Next (Region-J)
---------------
  Retrieves the next item from the hold stack and
  copies it at the current Environment cursor
  location. At the bottom of the stack, this command
  wraps to the top.
  

>>Rotate (Region-R)
-----------------
  Takes the item from the bottom of the stack and
  places it on the top of the hold stack.
  

>>Swap (Region-T)
---------------
  Swaps the top two items on the hold stack.
  
  The item next to the top of the hold stack becomes
  the top item of the hold stack. The original top
  item becomes the item next to the top of the hold
  stack.

  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Hold_Stack
  package Editor.Region

  
#Window Operations
  Window operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Window]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  Window operations provide facilities for managing
  Environment windows and include a number of commands
  that control Environment window size and
  disposition.

  From the Window Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Window operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F3] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Window operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Window
  operations are found on the Window Control Button
  Panel.
  
>>Expand (Window-!)
-----------------
  Enlarges the window by four lines, taking lines
  from an adjacent frame or neighboring window.
  

>>Contract (Window->)
-------------------
  Shrinks the current Environment window by four
  lines, adding lines to an adjacent frame or
  neighboring window.
  
  
>>Join (Window-J)
--------------
  Expands the current Environment window to the size
  of the current window plus the window frame below,
  replacing any window that might have been in that
  frame. Unless the window is locked, the window
  frame returns to its normal size automatically when
  the next object is viewed.
  
  If your current window is at the bottom of the
  Environment area, it will expand over the window
  directly above.
  

>>Join Previous (Window-O)
------------------------
  Expands the current Environment window to the size
  of the current window plus the window frame above,
  replacing any window that might have been in that
  frame. Unless the window is locked, the window
  frame returns to its normal size automatically when
  the next object is viewed. If your current window
  is at the top of the Environment area, it will
  expand over the window directly below.
                                                   

>>Beginning (Object-B)
--------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the top line of the
  image. Your view moves accordingly.
  

>>End (Object-E)
--------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the bottom line of
  the image. Your view moves accordingly.
  
  
>>Copy (Window-C)
--------------- 
  Divides the current Environment window into two
  windows with identical images. Each image can be
  scrolled independently. Making changes to one of
  the images affects both of them.
  
  
>>Delete (Window-D)
-----------------
  Removes a window temporarily from the Environment
  area. The image contained in the window remains
  listed in the Image Palette and the Environment
  Window Directory.
  
  
>>Transpose (Window-T)
--------------------
  Exchanges the current frame with another.
   
  The cursor position that results depends on the
  value of the Cursor_Transpose_Moves session switch.
  If the value is True, the cursor is left in the
  window that was the current window or, if no
  windows are below it, the first window on the
  screen below the message window. If the value is
  False, the cursor is left in the window that
  replaces the window that was the current window.
  See "Session Switches" in the Session and Job
  Management (SJM) book of the Environment Reference
  Manual for more information on session switches.
  
  
>>Next (Window-N)
---------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the frame directly
  below. From the bottom frame, the cursor wraps to
  the top frame.
  
  
>>Previous (Window-U)
-------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the frame directly
  above. From the top frame, the cursor wraps to the
  bottom frame.
  
  
>>Directory (Window-?)
--------------------
  Displays a list of the currently active Environment
  images.

  This image, called the Window Directory, allows
  various operations on these active images. See the
  Editing Specific Types (EST) book of the
  Environment Reference Manual for more information.
  
  
>>Enclosing Object (Window-H)
---------------------------
  Displays the enclosing object in an Environment
  window.
  
  
>>Parent (Window-Left Arrow)
--------------------------          
  Moves the Environment cursor to the previous window
  in the current frame.
  
  
>>Child (Window-V)
----------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next window in
  the current frame.  
  
  
>>Promote (Window-M)
------------------
  Changes the current window to the next higher
  state.

  A window can be in one of three states (ordered
  from highest to lowest):

  * Frozen (banner symbol:  @)

  * Normal

  * Replace (banner symbol:  ~)

  The Promote and Demote commands change the state of
  a window to the next higher or lower level.

  In the frozen state, the window will not be
  replaced and will be split only if there is no
  other space available for bringing up a new window.
  In the normal state, the window can become eligible
  for replacement if it becomes the least recently
  visited window (in this case, it will automatically
  be changed to the replace state). If it is in the
  replace state, the window will be replaced the next
  time the editor needs to bring a new window on the
  screen (only one window can be in the replace
  state).


>>Demote (Window-Y)
-----------------
  Changes the state of the current window to the next
  lower state (see "Promote," above, for a list of
  states and their descriptions).
  
  
>>Format (Window-F)
-----------------
  Divides the Environment area equally among the
  current number of frames.
 

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Window


#Image Operations
  Image operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Image]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.
  
  Image operations allow you to find and scroll
  images of Environment objects.
  
  From the Image Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Image operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F4] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Image operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Image
  operations are found on the Window Control Button
  Panel.


>>Beginning (Image-B)
-------------------
  Moves the cursor to the beginning of the image.
  
  
>>End (Image-E)
-------------
  Moves the cursor to the end of the image.
  
  
>>Fill On (Image-F)
-----------------
  Turns on fill mode. Fill mode wraps long text lines
  at the column position specified in the Fill Column
  entry box in the Edit:Typing Modes menu command.
  The default fill column is 72.
  
  
>>Fill Off (Image-X)
------------------  
  Turns off fill mode.
  
  
>>Left Scroll (Image-H)
---------------------
  Scrolls your view of the image to the left, if the
  left margin is not visible.
  
  
>>Rt Scroll (Image-J)
-------------------
  Scrolls your view of the image to the right.
  
  
>>Up Scroll (Image-U)
-------------------
  Scrolls your view of the image up.
  
  
>>Down Scroll (Image-N)
---------------------
  Scrolls your view of the image down.
  
  
>>Insert On (Image-I)
-------------------
  Turns on insert mode. This allows you insert text
  when you type without writing over existing text.
  
  
>>Overwrite (Image-O)
-------------------
  Turns on overwrite mode. This allows you to type
  over existing text.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Image


#Line Operations
  Line operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Line]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  Line operations allow you to manipulate lines in an
  image. Except for the Delete, Center, and Copy
  commands, editing operations affect the line
  starting at the cursor. The Beginning, End, Delete,
  Center, and Copy commands affect the entire line
  regardless of where the cursor is on the line.
  
  From the Line Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Line operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F5] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Line operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Line
  operations are bound to [Control][Meta] key
  combinations.

  
>>Beginning (Line-B)
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the first nonblank
  character in the line.
  
  
>>End (Line-E)
------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the first space
  after the last nonblank character in the line.
  
  
>>Center (Line-$)
---------------
  Centers from the first nonblank character on the
  line to the last nonblank character on the line.
  
  This command centers the nonblank characters of the
  entire line between the first column and the
  specified right margin as set in the fill column
  entry box of the Edit:Typing Modes menu command.
  The default is 72.
                    

>>Lowercase (Line-<)
------------------
  Converts the line to uppercase from the location of
  the Environment cursor to the end of the line.
  
  
>>Uppercase (Line->)
------------------
  Converts the line to lowercase from the location of
  the Environment cursor to the end of the line.


>>Capitalize (Line-^)           
-------------------
  Capitalizes the first letter of every word in the
  line, starting with the word that the Environment
  cursor is on.
  
  
>>Join (Line-J)
-------------  
  Joins the next line to the current line, leaving
  the cursor on the first character that came from
  the line below.
  
  
>>Transpose (Line-T)
------------------
  Exchanges the current and previous lines.
  
  
>>Open (Line-O)
-------------
  Opens a new line. If the Environment cursor is in
  the middle of a line, it moves the portion after
  the cursor to a new line below.
  
  
>>Copy (Line-C)
-------------
  Copies the current line and places the new copy
  immediately below the current line, pushing all
  remaining lines down in the image.
  
  
>>Insert (Line-I)
---------------
  Inserts a new line before the current line and
  indents to the previous indentation.  
  
  
>>What Line (Line-?)
------------------
  Displays in the message window the line and column
  number of the location of the Environment cursor.


>>Delete Bwd (Line-Delete)
------------------------
  Deletes from the Environment cursor back to the
  left margin.
                     

>>Delete Fwd (Line-K)
-------------------
  Deletes from the Environment cursor to the end of
  the line.
  
  
>>Delete (Line-D)
---------------
  Deletes the entire line the Environment cursor is
  on.  
                 
  
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Line
  
  
#Word Operations
  Word operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Word]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  Word operations allow you to manipulate strings of
  characters separated by word delimiters. The
  default includes blank and Ada delimiters.
  
  Except for the Delete command, which erases an
  entire word, the editing and movement commands
  affect the next, previous, or current word from the
  cursor forward to the next end word or from the
  cursor back to the previous beginning of word.
  
  From the Word Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Word operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F6] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Word operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for most Word
  operations are bound to [Meta] key combinations.


>>Beginning (Word-B)
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the first character
  of the current word.
  
  
>>End (Word-E)
------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the last character
  in the current word.
  
  
>>Transpose (Word-T)
------------------
  Exchanges the word the Environment cursor is on
  with the previous word.
  
  
>>Exchange (Word-X)
-----------------
  Replaces the misspelled word the Environment cursor
  is on with the first replacement choice in the
  Environment dictionary.
  
  
>>Lowercase (Word-<)
------------------
  Converts the word the Environment cursor is on to
  lowercase.
  
  
>>Uppercase (Word->)
------------------
  Converts the word the Environment cursor is on to
  uppercase.
  
  
>>Capitalize (Word-6)
-------------------
  Capitalizes the first letter of the word the
  Environment cursor is on.
  
  
>>Next Word (Word-J)
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next word.
  
  
>>Delete Fwd (Word-D)
-------------------- 
  Deletes the current word from the Environment
  cursor forward.
  
  
>>Delete (Word-D)
---------------
  Deletes the word the Environment cursor is on.
  
  
>>Del Bwd (Word-Delete)
---------------------
  Deletes the word from the Environment cursor
  backwards.
  
  
>>Spell Chk (Word-?)
------------------
  Checks the word for spelling using the Environment
  dictionary. If the Environment cannot find the word
  in the dictionary, it displays alternatives in the
  message window and underlines the misspelled word.
  
  
>>Add Dict (Word-I)
-----------------
  Adds the word the Environment cursor is on into the
  Environment dictionary. If the word is
  spell-checked again, no error will register.            
  
  
>>Chk Image (Word-M)
------------------
  Checks the image for misspelled words. All
  suspicious spellings are underlined.
  
  
>>Nxt Spell (Word-N) 
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the next underlined
  suspicious spelling and displays alternatives in
  the message window.
  
  
>>Learn (Word-R)
--------------
  Trains the spelling checker to correct the current
  spelling error automatically.
  
  
>>Spell Win (Word-W)
------------------
  Displays the speller options window, which contains
  status information about the spelling checker.
  

>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Word

#Mark Operations
  Mark operations are a kind of item operation. Item
  operation refers to particular key combinations that
  consist of a special kind of key, called an item key
  (in this case, [Mark]), followed by another key
  indicating the operation to be performed on that
  item.

  A mark is a remembered image position. The Rational
  Editor remembers marks as absolute image positions
  on one quadrant of a plane. Mark positions do not
  change to adjust for inserted or deleted lines and
  characters; the position is relative to the
  beginning of the image, not specific characters.
  
  The mark stack holds up to 100 marks. Since there
  is only one mark stack for all images, marks can be
  used to move your Environment cursor from image to
  image as well as from point to point within an
  image. Your view of the image moves accordingly, or
  the undisplayed image appears in an Environment
  window.
  
  Mark operations also manage keyboard macros,
  allowing you to create, bind, and execute macros
  that execute series of keystrokes in a single
  keystroke.
  
  From the Mark Operations dialog box, you can
  execute a particular operation either by clicking on
  the operation to be performed or pressing the key
  corresponding to the underlined character in the
  operation's label. Mark operations can also be
  performed by pressing [Control][F7] and then
  pressing the key corresponding to the desired
  operation.
  
  Mark operations are available on all Rational
  interfaces, including Access, although many Access
  commands offer alternatives to the item-operation
  technique. Access equivalents for Mark operations
  that manage macros are found on the Tools:Macro
  menu.
  

>>Mark Next (Mark-J)
------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the position
  specified by the next mark closest to the bottom of
  the stack.
  
  At the bottom of the stack, this command wraps to the top.

>>Mark Previous (Mark-H)  
----------------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the position
  specified by the next mark closest to the top of
  the stack.
  
  At the top of the stack, this command wraps to the
  bottom.
  

>>Mark Push (Mark-N)
--------------------
  Sets a repeat mark at the cursor and pushes it onto
  the stack.
  
  
>>Rotate (Mark-R)
---------------
  Rotates repeat number of marks from the bottom of
  the stack to the top of the stack.   


>>Swap (Mark-T)
-------------
  Swaps the top two marks on the mark stack.
  

>>Top (Mark-U)
------------
  Moves the Environment cursor to the top of the
  stack.   


>>Delete Top (Mark-Delete)
------------------------
  Deletes the top item in the mark stack.
  

>>Copy Top (Mark-P)
-----------------
  Makes another copy of the top mark of the mark
  stack on the top of the mark stack. The result is
  that there are two copies of the top item on the 
  top of the mark stack.  


>>Macro Start (Mark-A)
--------------------
  Prompts you to enter the key sequence that you want
  to make into a macro.
  

>>Macro End (Mark-E)
------------------
  Ends the key sequence that will become a macro.
  

>>Macro Bind (Mark-F)
-------------------
  Prompts you to press the key that the macro will be
  bound to.
  

>>Macro Execute (Mark-X)
----------------------
  Executes the most recently created macro.


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Appendix D, Access Equivalents: Key Bindings

Editing Images (EI) book of the Environment Reference
Manual
  package Editor.Macro
  package Editor.Mark

#Image Palette
  The Rational Access Image Palette provides an
  updatable listing of the images open under your
  Environment session. The Image Palette gives you the
  ability to list all the current images, including
  those that are not currently displayed in an
  Environment window, and the ability to recall any of
  these images to the Environment area.
  
  To open the Image Palette, click the Show Image
  Palette window-control button. (The button resembles
  stacked sheets of paper and is to the left of the F?
  button.)


>>Parts of the Image Palette
--------------------------
  The top panel of the palette--the button
  panel--contains buttons which control the palette.
  The Refresh button must be pressed every time you
  want to update the Image Palette to include new
  images brought up in the Environment area. (The
  Image Palette is not kept current automatically.)
  
  The middle panel--the user area--contains a
  user-defined list of Environment windows that can
  be recalled to the associated main Access window.
  You can keep a list of important images in the user
  area by using the Add and Remove buttons.
  
  The bottom panel--the full image list--contains a
  list of the Environment windows that are on the
  associated main Access window or have been replaced
  by other windows but not closed. You can change the
  relative size of the bottom two panels by placing
  the pointer on the sash control and dragging it up
  or down.
  

>>Working in the Image Palette    
-----------------------------        
  In the Image Palette:
  
  * To search through the full image list, use
    the scroll bar or search for a specific image
    using the search box and search arrows.

  * To redisplay a listed image, double-click the
    entry in the image list.
  
  * To manually search through the image list, drag
    the scroll bars.
     
  * To search for a specific image in the list, enter
    a character string in the search box, using
    wildcards if desired, and direct the search with
    the search arrows.
    
  * To add an image from the image list into the user
    area, click the image name (highlight it), and
    click the Add button.
      
  * To remove an image from the user area, click the
    image and click the Remove button.
      
  * To update the Image Palette, click the Refresh
    button.
    
  * To close the Image Palette, click its Remove
    Window button. (This button is located in the top,
    right corner of the palette and looks like four
    arrows pointing inwards.)
                 
      
>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Chapter 3, Using Special Features


#Just-Do-It Mode
  You can suppress the dialog box for certain
  commands. This is especially useful if you execute
  the command with the same dialog box settings many
  times in a row, or if you use the default settings.
  Users who wish to bypass a dialog box when
  executing a menu operation can use the Just-Do-It
  mode, which executes the command without displaying
  the dialog box.

  To execute with Just-Do-It mode, press the [Meta]
  key while executing the command. The Environment
  completes the command using the default settings in
  the dialog box.

  You can change the default settings of a dialog box
  by setting the new options in the box and executing
  the command or pressing the Cancel button. The next
  time you execute the command with Just-Do-It mode,
  it will execute using the new default options.
 
  Note that this mode has no effect on most menu
  commands. The following commands, however, can be
  executed with Just-Do-It mode:

  * File:Print 
  * CMVC:Accept Changes
  * Program:Promote To Coded
  * Program:Promote To Installed
  * Program:Promote To Source
  * Program:Demote To Installed
  * Program:Demote To Source
  * Program:Demote To Archived


>>SEE ALSO
--------

Rational Access User's Guide
  Chapter 3, Using Special Features